Home

Subaru A3100BE Automobile User Manual

1. eeeee On pavement and off road driving een Winter driving incite ei eee Operation during cold weather ccceseeeee Driving on snowy and icy roads een Corrosion protection EEN SMOW A d Tire CAINS E Rocking the Vehicle cccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeees Loading your vehicle ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees Vehicle capacity weight esssseeeeeeeeeeees GVWR and GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating csseeee Roof rail and crossbar if equipped Trailer hitch if equipped cceeeeeesseeeeeeeees Connecting a trailer cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees When you do not tow a trailer 00ee Trailer e UL e WE Warranties and maintenance 0 0eeee Maximum load limits ENNEN Driving tips Trailer hitches siccscscsiccced casasesticeestieninscdceenseicasissenen ce 8 21 Connecting a trailer Ree 8 22 Trailer TOWING tips sicciessispcccecsetdeccecececsinetacenesndetcceens 8 23 8 2 Driving tips New vehicle break in driving the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km The performance and long life of your ve hicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new Follow these instructions during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km e Do not race the engine And do not al low engine speed to exceed 4 000 rpm ex cept in an emergency e Do
2. 100512 11 To remove the child restraint system press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract com pletely The belt will return to the ELR mode NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully E Installing a booster seat e Child restraint systems and seat belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle Unsecured child restraint sys tems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop turn or accident they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child When you install a child restraint system follow the manufacturer s instructions supplied with it After installing the child restraint system check to ensure that it is held se curely in position If it is not held tight and secure the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in creased 100513 1 Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear most position 2 Place the booster seat in the rear seat ing position and sit the child on it The child should sit well
3. CONTINUED 1 1 4 Maintenance and service Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes If something does get in your eyes thoroughly wash them out with clean water Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system or attempt to take its connectors apart as that may activate the system or it can render it inoperative The wir ing and connectors of these sys tems are yellow for easy identifi cation NEVER use a circuit tester for these wiring If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pre tensioner needs service consult your nearest SUBARU dealer Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to pre vent the vehicle from moving e Always let the engine cool down Engine parts become very hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time after the engine is stopped Do not spill engine oil engine coolant brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine components This may cause a fire Always remove the key from the ignition switch When the ignition switch is in the ON position the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when the engine is stopped E When you do checking or ser vicing in the engine compart ment while the engine is run ning A running engine can be dangerous Keep your fingers hands clothing hair and tools away from
4. If this light comes on when the engine is running it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system Instruments and controls 3 1 3 is not working properly If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine oil level If the oil level is low add oil immediately If the engine oil is at the proper level but the light remains on contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately E AT OIL TEMPerature AT OIL warning light TEMP The AT oil temperature warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approximately two seconds If this light comes on when the engine is running it may indicate that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too hot If the light comes on while driving it is un necessary to stop the vehicle but avoid driving up steep grades or in stop and go traffic CONTINUED 3 1 4 Instruments and controls E Rear differential oil tem R DIFF perature warning light Reduce vehicle speed and park the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible if the R DIFF TEMP light comes on Continued driving with this light on can damage the rear dif ferential and other parts of the pow ertrain If this light comes on when the engine is running it may indicate that the rear differ ential oil temperature is too hot
5. ccceseeeeees 11 31 Windshield wiper blade assembly un 11 31 Windshield wiper blade rubber cscceeeeeeeeees 11 32 Rear window wiper blade assembly 0 11 33 Rear window wiper blade rubber ue 11 33 Battery E 11 35 PUS CS ee EE Ee 11 36 Main dr 11 37 Installation Of accessories REENEN 11 38 Replacing bulbe 7eeseegeeed s egeee 11 39 el UU LO EE 11 40 Parking light EE 11 41 Front turn signal light EEN 11 42 Front fog light Geesse eg ees 11 42 Rear combination lights ee 11 42 Backup light Tail light REENEN 11 43 Rear gate light nsssnssnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 11 43 License plate light ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 44 Dome light asisip epsa Egeegeegesesgeeeege 11 44 Map light EE 11 45 Door step light zereck 11 45 Cargo area light EE 11 46 Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions The scheduled maintenance items re quired to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the Warranty and Mainte nance Booklet For details of your maintenance schedule read the separate Warranty and Mainte nance Booklet When maintenance and service are re quired it is recommended that all work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer If you perform maintenance and service by yourself you should familiarize your self with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and ser vice for your SUBARU Incorrect o
6. 6 16 Interior equipment may make the programming quicker and easier 600432 1 Locate the training button on the ga rage door opener motor head unit The ex act location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener If it is difficult to locate the training button re fer to your garage door opener s instruc tion manual 600433 1 Training button 2 Press the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit which acti vates the training light on the unit Pro ceed to step 3 within 30 seconds 3 Inside the vehicle firmly press and re lease the HomeLink button that was pro grammed in the section above Press and release the button a second time to com plete the programming procedure NOTE Some garage door openers may re quire you to do the above procedure a third time to complete the program ming 4 The garage door opener should now recognize the HomeLink Wireless Con trol System and your garage door opener should activate when the HomeLink but ton is pressed E Programming for entrance gates and garage door open ers in Canada 1 Unplug the motor of the entrance gate or garage door opener from the outlet 600430 2 Press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons NOTE If an
7. If the light comes on while driving reduce vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place Park the vehicle for several minutes After the light goes out you can start driving If the light does not go out contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for service NOTE e If the tire pressures are not correct and or the tires are not all the same size and brand the rear differential will be heavily loaded when the vehicle is driven resulting in an abnormally high oil temperature e The rear differential oil will deterio rate if its temperature increases enough for the rear differential oil tem perature warning light to come on It is advisable to have the rear differential oil replaced as soon as possible E Low tire pressure warn 1 ing light When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the low tire pressure warn ing light will come on for approximately 2 seconds to check that the tire pressure monitoring system TPMS is functioning properly If there is no problem and all tires are properly inflated the light will go out Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure rec ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres sure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres sure label you should determine
8. The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system It serves as catalyst to reduce HC CO and NOx in exhaust gas Driving tips 8 3 es thus providing cleaner exhaust To avoid damage to the catalytic convert er e Use only unleaded gasoline Even a small amount of leaded gasoline will dam age the catalytic converter e Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle e Avoid racing the engine e Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving e Keep your engine tuned up If you feel the engine running rough misfiring back firing or incomplete combustion have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer e Do not apply undercoating or rust pre vention treatment to the heat shield of cat alytic converter and the exhaust system 8 4 Driving tips Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries Driving tips for AWD vehicles To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times always have the recommend ed maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet performed at the specified time or mileage intervals When planning to use your vehicle in an other country e Confirm the availability of the correct fu el Refer to the Fuel requirements sec tion in chapter 7 e Comply with all regulations and require ments of each country e Always maintain a safe driving speed a
9. To activate the right turn signal push the turn signal lever up To activate the left turn signal push the turn signal lever down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically If the lever does not return after cornering return the lever to the neutral position by hand To signal a lane change push the turn sig nal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change The turn signal in dicator lights will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change The lever will re turn automatically to the neutral position when you release it Instruments and controls 3 27 Illumination brightness con trol 300510 When the light switch is in the OFF posi tion you can adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination for better visibility The brightness of audio air conditioner multi function display if equipped and in strument panel illumination automatically dims when the light switch is in the o0z or SCH positions You can ad just brightness of the illumination for better visibility To brighten turn the control dial upward To darken turn the control dial downward NOTE When the control dial is turned fully up CONTINUED 3 28 Instruments and controls ward the illumination brightness be comes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work at all Parking light switch Front fog light switch Th
10. side of the TUNE TRACK button 2 to skip to the beginning of the next track file track Each time this side of the button is pressed the indicated track file track number will increase NOTE In an MP3 folder skipping past the last track file track will take you back to the first track file track in the folder V Backward direction Briefly press the y side of the TUNE TRACK button 2 to skip to the beginning of the current track file track Each time this side of the button is pressed the indi cated track file track number will de crease NOTE In an MP3 folder skipping past the last track file track will take you back to the first track file track in the folder V Fast forwarding and fast reversing V Fast forwarding Press the side of the TUNE TRACK button 2 continuously to fast forward the track file Release the button to stop fast forward ing NOTE If you fast forward past the last track file track on the disc the player will select the first track file track on the disc and start playing it Audio 5 9 V Fast reversing Press the y side of the TUNE TRACK button 2 continuously to fast reverse the track file track Release the button to stop fast reversing NOTE If you fast reverse to the beginning of the first track file track on the disc the fast reversing will stop and the player will start playing the first track file track on
11. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected 4 H both warning lights come on again and stay illuminated after the engine has been restarted shut down the engine again apply the parking brake and check the brake fluid level 5 If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark the EBD system may be faulty Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system in spected 6 If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark DO NOT drive the vehicle In stead have the vehicle towed to the near est SUBARU dealer for repair E Low fuel warning light m The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty approximately 2 6 US gal 10 liters or 2 2 Imp gal It only op erates when the ignition switch is in the ON position NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an internal fuel quantity of approximately 4 0 US gal 15 liters 3 3 Imp gal E Door open warning light 300505 The indicators are located in the center portion of the dashboard When any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed it is indicated by the corre sponding part of the door warning light Always make sure this light is out before you start to drive Instruments and controls 3 1 7 E Windshield washer fluid CC warning light This light comes on when the fluid level in the windshield washer fluid tank falls to
12. Maintenance and service 1 1 31 e Return the passenger side wiper arm to its original position before returning the driver side wiper arm to its original position Other wise the passenger side wiper assembly and driver side wiper assembly will touch each other possibly resulting in scratches If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this method replace the wiper blades using the following proce dures Be sure to use genuine SUBARU wiper blade rubbers as replacements E Windshield wiper blade as sembly 1 Raise the wiper arm off the windshield B00329 CONTINUED 1 1 32 Maintenance and service 2 While pressing the wiper blade stop per slide the wiper blade assembly down ward 3 Remove the wiper blade assembly from the wiper arm 4 Put the wiper blade assembly on the wiper arm and slide it upward while press ing the wiper blade stopper Make sure that it locks in place 5 Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position Do not let go of the wiper arm until it touches the windshield Letting the wiper arm snap onto the windshield could damage it E Windshield wiper blade rub ber B00396 1 Metal support 1 Grasp the locked end of the blade rub ber assembly and pull it firmly until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the met al support B00397 1 Metal spines 2 If the new blade rubber is not provided with two met
13. P or R position only after the vehicle is complete ly stopped Shifting while the ve hicle is moving may cause dam age to the transmission e Do not race the engine for more than five seconds in any position except the N or P position when the brake is set or when chocks are used in the wheels This may cause the automatic transmission fluid to overheat e Avoid shifting from one of the for ward driving positions into the R position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped Such shifting may cause damage to the transmission When parking the vehicle first se curely apply the parking brake and then place the selector lever in the P position Avoid parking for a long time with the selector le ver in any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery NOTE e When the engine coolant tempera ture is still low your vehicle s automat ic transmission will up shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in or der to shorten the warm up time and improve driveability The gearshift tim ing will automatically shift to the nor mal timing after the engine has warmed up e Immediately after ATF automatic transmission fluid is replaced you may feel that the automatic transmis sion operation is somewhat unusual This results from invalidation of data which the on board computer has col lected and stored in
14. or Do not let this happen depending upon the context Vehicle symbols There are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Mark A G E D r Name CAUTION Passengers windows lock Fuel Front fog lights Parking lights Mark Name Windshield wiper deicer Wiper intermittent Windshield wiper and wash er A Hazard warning flasher Seat heater Rear window wiper and washer Lights Parking lights tail lights li cense plate lights and instru ment panel illumination Head lights Turn signal 4 e Name Instrument panel outlets Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets Foot outlets Windshield defroster and foot outlets Windshield defroster Rear window defogger Out side mirror defogger Air recirculation Outside air Child restraint lower anchor S ages RANO Child restraint top tether an Lb P chorages ka Horn Illumination brightness Engine hood nn izete A A A 7 Engine oil Washer Door lock Transmitter Fan speed Dog Door unlock Transmitter CONTINUED Mark Name Rear gate Transmitter Safety precautions when driving E Seatbelt and SRS airbag e All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move Otherwise the possibility of serious injury
15. Do not perform any of the following modifications Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system e Attachment of any equipment bush bar winches snow plow skid plate etc other than genu ine SUBARU accessory parts e Modification of the suspension system or front end structure Keys and doors EE 2 2 Valet MOde 2iciaicaceccsctctaccs saci cnidececaceiciarahaecaietteidcatcaces 2 17 Key number ee ege antes 2 2 Passive arming cccsssscessceesssssseeeeeessssseeeeeeeeesees 2 17 Immobilizer sisicsstistvtsncsnsndouranosseasdutantnnenrendnionniss 2 3 Tripped sensor identification mmm 2 18 S c rity ID TEE 2 3 Shock sensors dealer Option ssseeiee 2 18 Security indicator light c cccccccsesseesseeeeeeees 2 4 Child safety locks zue ala ase 2 19 Key replacement ENEE 2 4 EE 2 19 Door LOCKS cccesccceeeeeceseceeeeeeesseeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeees 2 4 Power windows c cccccsseceesssseeessseeceesssaeeeeesseeeeeeaes 2 19 Locking and unlocking from the outside 2 4 Rear gate isine nasen pia iNe 2 22 Locking and unlocking from the inside 2 5 Moonroof 2 23 Battery drainage prevention function e 2 6 h dee Kee e Power door locking switches enn 2 6 Sliding FUNCTION e 2 24 Key lock in prevention function Een 2 7 Anti entrapment function ccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 24 Remote keyless entry system cccceeeeeeeeeees 2 8 TE
16. Driving tips 8 19 V Gross Vehicle Weight GVW and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 800212 Gross Vehicle Weight The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight GVW is the com bined total of the weight of the vehicle driver passengers luggage trailer hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle Therefore the GVW changes depending on the situation Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver s door of your vehi CONTINUED 8 20 Driving tips cle 800203 Certification label Vv Gross Axle Weight GAW and Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 800213 Gross Axle Weight The total weight applied to each axle GAW must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehi cle The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification label 800203 Certification label To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing sta tion Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to p
17. RPT button 6 twice while a track file track is playing The display will show D RPT and the disc folder will be played repeatedly To cancel the disc folder repeat play mode press the RPT button once more The D RPT indication will go off and the normal playback mode will be resumed NOTE e Each time you briefly press the but ton the mode will change to the next one in the following sequence RPT gt D RPT gt CANCEL If you accidentally press the button and cancel the disc folder repeat play mode press it again to reselect the disc folder repeat play mode e The disc folder repeat play mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps e Press the RDM button Press the SCAN button Press the A button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Press the RSE AUX button Press the yv or a side of the SEEK FLDR button MP3 disc e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position Y Random playback V Non MP3 disc Press the RDM button 5 briefly during disc playback to play all of the tracks on the disc in a random order The display will show RDM and all of the tracks on the disc will be played in a random order To cancel random mode press the button again The RDM indication will go off and the normal playback mode will be re sumed NOTE
18. Rear window defogger button in chapter 3 5 Temperature control dial passenger s side 6 Air conditioner button 7 Air flow mode selection button 8 Air inlet selection button Climate control 4 5 9 OFF button 10 AUTO button Vv AUTO button AUTO mode operation 400507 When the AUTO button is pressed the indicator light on the button comes on In this state fan speed air flow distribution air inlet control and air conditioner com pressor operation are automatically con trolled Manual mode operation If you operate any of the buttons on the control panel other than the OFF button and temperature control dial during auto matic mode operation the indicator light will go out You can then manually control the system as desired using the button you operated CONTINUED 4 6 Climate control To change the system back to the AUTO mode press the AUTO button Vv OFF button 400508 The Automatic Climate Control system turns off the air conditioner compressor and fan turn off when the OFF button is pressed When the OFF button is pressed the outside air introduction mode air inlet se lection OFF is automatically selected Vv Temperature control dial 400510 Passenger s side It is possible to make separate tempera ture settings for the driver s side and pas senger s side Each t
19. and ensure all doors are shut 2 Drive to an open level area away from large metallic objects or structures and make certain the ignition switch is in the ON position 3 Press and hold the left button for 3 sec onds then release and the compass will enter the calibration mode CAL and di rection will be displayed 4 Drive slowly in a circle until CAL dis appears from the display approximately two or three circles The compass is now calibrated 5 Further calibration may be necessary should outside influences cause the mirror to read inaccurately You will know that this has occurred if your compass begins to read in only limited directions Should you encounter this situation return to step one of the above procedure and recali brate the mirror Instruments and controls 3 35 Vv Compass zone adjustment 1 The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8 Refer to the Compass calibration zone map attached to the end of this manual to verify that the compass zone setting is correct for your geographical lo cation 2 Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then release and the word ZONE will briefly appear and then the zone number will be displayed 3 Press the right hand button repeatedly to cycle the display through all possible zone settings Stop cycling when the cor rect zone setting for your location is dis played 4 Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the
20. ed when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 57 V Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the driv er s driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbag s will deploy 100536 The only the driver s SRS frontal airbag or both driver s and front passenger s SRS CONTINUED 1 58 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the un dercarriage area from the road surface such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb V Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver s driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbag s is unlikely to de ploy 100537 There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of driver s driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbag s If the vehicle strikes an object such as a telephone pole or sign pole or if it slides under a truck s load bed or if it sustains an oblique offset fron tal impact the driver s driver s and front passengers SRS frontal airbag s may not deploy depending on the level of acci dent forces involved V Examples of the types of accidents in which t
21. est to the top of the occupant s ears Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear E Active head restraint 100089 The front seats of your vehicle are equipped with active head restraints They automatically tilt forward slightly in the event the vehicle is struck from the rear decreasing the amount of rearward head movement and thus reducing the risk of whiplash For maximum effectiveness the head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant s ears e Each active head restraint is ef fective only when its height is properly adjusted and the driver passenger sits in the correct posi tion on the seat If your vehicle is involved in a rear end collision have an autho rized SUBARU dealer inspect the active head restraints The active head restraints may not operate in the event the vehi cle experiences only a slight im pact in the rear The active head restraints may be damaged if they are pushed hard from behind or subjected to shock As a result they may not function if the vehicle suffers a rear impact Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 5 E Lumbar support Pull the lever forward or backward Pulling the lever forward will increase the amount of support for your lower bac
22. indicator light flashes first slowly then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flashing light indi cates successful programming of the new frequency signal 6 Press and hold the programmed button and check the HomeLink indicator light If the indicator light stays on continuously your garage door should activate and the programming is completed If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds and then stays on continuously Interior equipment 6 15 your garage door opener may be protect ed by a rolling code feature In this case you need to perform the additional steps for Programming rolling code protected garage door openers in the U S A de scribed in the following NOTE Rolling code protected garage door openers are manufactured after 1996 See the instruction manual of your ga rage opener for confirmation 7 Reconnect the motor of your garage door opener to the outlet 8 Test your garage door opener by pressing the programmed HomeLink button E Programming rolling code protected garage door open ers in the U S A If your garage door opener has a rolling code feature program the HomeLink Wireless Control System for it by following steps 1 through 5 in the Programming ga rage door openers in the U S A section above and then continuing with the steps below NOTE The assistance of a second person CONTINUED
23. nnnnnnnnnrnnrneeern 11 21 Engine oil level EE 11 7 Fluid level a geaegeeEee 11 15 11 19 11 20 Gear oil levels isese E a 11 17 Child restraint systems 1 30 Installation with seatbelt ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 33 Lower and tether anchorages cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 38 EE 5 LOCKS EE 2 19 Chime e EE 3 4 Seatbelt EE 1 17 Cleaning Aluminum wheels ege EEN 10 3 EE een 10 4 Ventilator grille ebe eege eege 4 10 Climate control system AEN 4 5 ee 3 21 Coat hok ege EE 6 10 Cooling system BEE 11 10 Corrosion protection viespe teaser enact 8 10 10 3 ET ur EE 7 27 Set indicator ie EEN 3 20 CUD NOMEN ege EEN 6 6 D Daytime running light system cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 Differential gear oil Index 14 3 TE eer Ee 11 16 Eesen 11 17 El Ee EEN 12 2 Disarming the system gebeten DS ENEE Eege 2 16 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators seeseeeeeee 7 16 E ele 31116 EE 6 2 11 44 Dgr locks eeh 2 4 Door open warning light EEN 3 17 Drive EE 11 15 Driving All Wheel Drive vehicle AANEREN 3 17 Car phone cell phone EEN 7 Kill IAG EE 6 EI e EE 6 Foreign EERSTEN 8 4 EE 7 Snowy and icy roads EE 8 9 MPS aae tte Ate a e ee ale aE Sane 7 13 8 4 Tired or sleepy wxwierect atin bccouttavccdidientte ere naderiinens eoassmasosed 7 E El trical System EE 12 3 Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD system 7 18 Emergency Locking Retractor ELR s sssnssn
24. riage Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your ve hicle and may cause it to stall Never at tempt to drive through rushing water re gardless of its depth it can wash away the ground from under your tires resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover e Always check your brakes for effective ness immediately after driving in sand mud or water Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads e Do not drive or park over or near flam mable materials such as dry grass or fall en leaves as they may burn easily The exhaust system is very hot while the en gine is running and right after engine stops This could create a fire hazard e After driving through tall grass mud rocks sand rivers etc check that there is no grass bush paper rags stones sand etc adhering to or trapped on the underbody Clear off any such matter from the underbody If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur e Secure all cargo carried inside the vehi cle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks During sudden stops or jolts unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause in jury Do not pile heavy loads on the roof Those loads raise the veh
25. 700302 1 To open the fuel filler lid pull the lid re lease lever The lever is on the floor at the left of the driver s seat CONTINUED 7 4 Starting and operating 700304 1 Open 2 Close 3 Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly counterclockwise e Gasoline vapor is highly flamma ble Before refueling always first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted ciga rettes open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area e When opening the cap do not re move the cap quickly Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck especially in hot weather which may cause in jury 4 Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically clicks off Do not add any more fuel 5 Put the cap back on turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise Be certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tightening 6 Close the fuel filler lid completely If you spill any fuel on the painted surface rinse it off immediately Otherwise the painted surface could be damaged NOTE H 200253 e You will see the m sign in the fuel gauge This indicates that the fuel filler door lid is located on the right side of the vehicle e If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap the CHECK ENGINE warning light may come on Refer to the Warning and i
26. E Cargo area light 600405 The cargo area light switch has three po sitions DOOR The light comes on only when the rear gate is opened Middle position The light stays off c The light stays on continuously Map light Sun visors 600406 To turn on the map light push the switch To turn it off push the switch again When leaving the vehicle make sure the light is turned off to avoid battery dis charge The light also can be turned on by use of the remote keyless entry transmitter See the Remote keyless entry system in chapter 2 for detailed information The setting of the period for which the light stays on can be changed by a SUBARU dealer Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details 400228 To block out glare swing down the visors To use the sun visor at a side window swing it down and move it sideways Interior equipment 6 3 E Sun visor extension plate 600407 With the sun visor positioned over the side window you can use the sun visor exten sion plate to prevent glare through the gap between the sun visor and center pillar To use the extension plate pull it toward the rear of the vehicle When you have fin ished using it stow it by pushing it toward the front of the vehicle CONTINUED 6 4 interior equipment 600408 Do not pull out the extension plate with the sun visor positioned over the windshield The
27. Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while gripping the edge of the disc then insert it in to the slot with the label side up and the player will automatically pull the disc into position NOTE e DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME e Be sure to insert a disc with the label side up If you insert the disc the label side down CHECK DISC will appear on the display and the player will not play anything e After the last song finishes the play er will automatically return to track 1 the first song on the disc e If you insert a disc that cannot be played by the player CHECK DISC will appear on the display and the play er will revert to the previously selected mode e The player is designed to be able to play music CD Rs and music CD RWs but it may not be able to play certain ones e Single CDs i e 8 cm 3 inch CDs are not supported and if inserted they will be immediately ejected V When CD is in the player When the CD button 1 is pressed the player will start playback NOTE After the last song finishes the player will automatically return to track 1 the first song on the disc V To stop playback of a CD When the POWER VOL button is pressed during playback of a CD the CD stops playing temporarily To let the CD resume playing press the button again V To select a song from its beginning V Forward direction Briefly press the a
28. If you touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves finger prints or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots causing the bulb to break If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb surface wipe them away with a soft cloth mois tened with alcohol NOTE e If headlight aiming is required con sult your SUBARU dealer for proper adjustment of the headlight aim e It may be difficult to replace the bulbs Have your SUBARU dealer re place the bulbs if necessary Vv Low beam light bulbs B00340 1 Remove the bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise B00341 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 3 Remove the retainer spring 4 Replace the bulb then set the retainer spring securely 5 Reconnect the electrical connector 6 Install the bulb cover V High beam light bulbs B00342 1 Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb 2 Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by turning it counterclockwise 3 Replace the bulb with new one 4 Reconnect the electrical connector At this time use care not to touch the bulb surface 5 To install the bulb to the headlight as sembly turn it clockwise until it clicks Maintenance and service 1 1 41 E Parking light B00343 1 Remove the bulb socket from the headlight assembly by turning it counter clockwise B00344 2 Pull the bulb out
29. Inc P O Box 11204 San Juan Puerto Rico 00910 787 793 2828 There are currently no Subaru distributors Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 55 in any other U S territories If you are in such an area please contact the Subaru distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle CONTINUED 1 56 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags V Operation 100534 1 Driver s side 2 Passenger s side The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys tem is designed to determine the activa tion or deactivation condition of the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag depend ing on the total load on the front passen ger s seat monitored by the front passen ger s occupant detection system weight sensor For this reason only the driver s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision but this does not mean failure of the system If the front sub sensors inside both front fenders and the impact sensors in the air bag control module detect a predeter mined amount of force during a frontal col lision the control module sends signals to the airbag module s only driver s module or both drivers and front passenger s modules instructing the module s to in flate the SRS frontal airbag s The driv er s and front passenger s SRS frontal air bags use dual stage inflators The two in flators of each a
30. L9 to R9 Volume control 0 to 40 For less treble sound To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front speaker vol ume To increase left speaker volume and decrease right speaker vol ume For less volume Vv FM AM selection button Push the FM 2 or AM 1 button when the radio is off to turn on the radio Push the FM or AM button when the radio is on to select FM1 FM2 or AM reception For more treble sound To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear speaker vol ume To increase right speaker volume and decrease left speaker vol ume For more volume YV Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received V Tuning V Manual tuning Press the side of the TUNE TRACK button 4 to increase the tuning frequency and press the yv side of the button to decrease it Each time the button is pressed the fre quency interval can be changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0 2 MHz in the FM mode If you hold down the side of the but ton the tuning frequency will increase continuously and if you hold down the wv side of the button the tuning fre quency will decrease continuously Re lease the button when your desired fre quency is reached NOTE While you are holding down either side of the TUNE TRACK button the tuning frequency will not stop changing even if the frequency
31. Moonroof 5 7 5A Combination meter 6 7 5A Remote control rear view mirrors Seat heater relay 7 15A Combination meter Integrated unit 8 20A Stop light 9 20A Mirror heater Front wiper deicer 10 7 5A Power supply Battery 11 7 5A Turn signal unit 12 15A e Automatic transmission unit e SRS airbag system Sub e Engine control unit e Integrated unit 13 20A Cargo socket CONTINUED 12 6 Specifications Fuse panel 30 31 32 33 Fuse rating 30A 7 5A 7 5A 7 5A Circuit Front wiper Auto air conditioner unit Integrated unit Headlight left side relay Vehicle dynamics control unit Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit 14 15A Position light e Tail light e Rear combination light 15 20A e Console socket 16 10A e illumination 17 15A Seat heaters 18 10A e Backup light 19 7 5A e Headlight right side relay 20 Empty 21 7 5A e Starter relay 22 15A e Air conditioner e Rear window defogger relay coil 23 15A e Rear wiper e Rear window washer 24 15A e Audio unit 25 15A e SRS airbag system Main 26 7 5A e Power window relay 27 15A e Rear blower fan 28 15A e Rear blower fan 29 15A Fog light E Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Specifications 12 7 C00100 A Main f
32. PRESS CONTINUED 13 4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Maximum load rating applies only to the tire not to the vehi cle Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire s rated load V Construction type Applicable construction of this tire For example TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL Y Construction The generic name of each cord mate rial used in the plies both sidewall and tread area of this tire For example PLIES TREAD 2 STEEL 2 POLYESTER 1 NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYESTER V Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG For details refer to Uniform tire qual ity grading standards in this chapter Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13 5 E Recommended tire inflation pressure v Recommended cold tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires is as follows Tire size P255 55R18 104H Wheel size 18 x 8JJ Pressure 33 psi 230 kPa 2 3 kgf cm 32 psi 220 kPa 2 2 kgf cm Rear at trailer towing 32 psi 220 kPa 2 2 kgf cm Temporary spare tire Size T165 80R17 Pressure 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 kgf cm CONTINUED 13 6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Vv Vehicle placard The vehicle placard is affixed to the driver s side B pillar Example Co Y T TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION d a
33. The indicated time will change in one minute increments If you keep the button pressed the rate at which the indicated time changes will speed up When you keep either the or button pressed time change will pause for 1 sec ond at the end of each 30 minute change The clock will start going forward or back ward again quickly after this 1 second pause To ensure safety do not attempt to set the time during driving as an ac cident could result Instruments and controls 3 21 Outside temperature indica tion NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a navi gation system refer to the separate Operating Instructions for Monitor System eee FT OUT TEMP IS Jr 300550 U S spec vehicles CONTINUED 3 22 Instruments and controls OUT TEMP Ino 300551 Canada spec vehicles The outside temperature indicator shows the outside temperature in a range from 22 to 122 F 30 to 50 C The indicator can give a false reading un der any of the following conditions e When there is too much sun e During idling while running at low speeds in a traffic jam when the engine is restarted immediately following a shut down e When the actual outside temperature falls outside the specified indicator range YV Low outside temperature warning I IlO ZU LLLz ay m a r o A 300552 U S spec vehicles OU
34. The Aspect Ratio Section Height divided by Section Width helps provide more dimensional infor mation about the tire size Example P 255 55 R 18 1 2 3 4 5 1 P Certain tire type used on light duty vehicles such as passenger cars 2 Section Width in millimeters 3 Aspect Ratio section height section width 4 R Radial Construction 5 Rim diameter in inches V Load and Speed Rating Descrip tions The load and speed rating descrip tions will appear following the size designation They provide two important facts about the tire First the number des ignation is its load index Second the letter designation indicates the tire s speed rating Example P 255 55 R 18 104 H Size designation 6 7 6 Load Index A numerical code which specifies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol at maximum in flation pressure For example 104 means 1 984 Ibs 900 kg 100 means 1 764 Ibs 800 kg 90 means 1 323 Ibs 600 kg Load indices apply only to the tire not to the vehicle Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire s rated load 7 Speed Rating An alphabetical system describing a tire s capability to travel at established and predeter mined speeds For example H means 130 mph 210 km h Consumer information and Reporting safety defec
35. all season tires as original equip ment You should be aware that some winter tires with that same size desig nation may actually be too large for the vehicle and may cause rubbing on sharp turns Listed in the following is the winter tire size that we recommend Recommended winter Snow tire size P255 55R18 stud less E Tire chains Tire chains cannot be used on tires listed in the following because of lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body All model P255 55R 18 winter snow tires Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the use of tire chains in which case put genuine SUBARU spring chains on the front wheels only Genuine SUBARU spring chains are available from your SUBARU dealer These chains can be installed on all season tires as origi nal equipment Never install them on win ter Snow tires When driving with tire chains drive at speeds below 19 mph 30 km h When a temporary spare tire is on a front wheel replace the temporary spare tire with the rear tire on the same side of the vehicle and then fit chains on the front tires Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains overconfidence because you are driving with tire chains could eas ily lead to a serious accident E Rocking the vehicle If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow sand or mud depress the acceler ator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth betwee
36. cccccceceseereeeereee 11 16 Brake fluid eegene dee EE SES 11 20 OIL grade and viscosity 11 9 11 10 11 17 11 18 Power steering fluid eebe eege 11 19 Spark PIUOS tee een 11 14 Remote keyless entry system eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 Replacement Brake pad and lining EEN 11 22 Wiper EE 11 31 Replacing Air cleaner element ccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 11 13 Battery Remote keyless entry system 00005 2 10 Lost transmitters keyless entry system sn0 2 11 PeplaCing ugeet 11 39 Cargo area Le In EE 11 46 D me TOG EE 11 44 Door step light EE 11 45 Front TOG light saes a 11 42 Front turn signal light 20010 11 42 el elen UE 11 40 License plate light cccccccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 11 44 Map Me LEE EE 11 45 Parking light EE 11 41 Rear combination light 11 42 ROCKING ING e 8 11 Roof rail and crossbar E 8 13 S Safety Precautions when driving ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaaaes 4 DEE ee 2 EU 2 Seat Felten ee ere 10 4 EE 1 6 e 4 Maintenance AE 1 26 Pretensioners EE 1 27 Safety EE 1 15 Warning light and Chime cic vycivisee avis ideesseneotedtens 1 17 Seatbelts Gegend Gelee 1 15 Second row SEALS sis feecdah nes bedeeddetiints tateead et eangiad scan adored 1 6 Selector EE 7 9 7 10 Keep indicator gees centteestiarats 3 20 Shift lock release gi ske e ia deesvendcetediscat eden shencatd eds
37. e When you feel the ABS system operating you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the op eration of the ABS system The ABS system prevents the lock up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfac es This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock up When the ABS system is operating you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal This is normal when the ABS operates The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph 10 km h E ABS system self check You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating sound of ABS from the engine compartment just af ter the vehicle is started This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS system being carried out and does not in dicate any abnormal condition E ABS warning light ABS O O 700314 The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ONT posi tion and goes out after approximately two seconds This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly AXCAUTION If the warning light behaves as fol lows the ABS system may not be working properly When the warning light is on the ABS function shuts down however the conventional brake system con tinues to op
38. in ad dition vehicle speed should be re duced considerably Simply hav ing a Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation CONTINUED 7 20 Starting and operating Activation of the Vehicle Dynam ics Control system is an indica tion that the road being travelled on has a slippery surface since having Vehicle Dynamics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions its activation should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably Whenever suspension compo nents steering components or an axle are removed from a vehicle equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform an in spection of that system The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size type and brand Furthermore the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver s side door pillar In the event of wheelspin and or skidding on a slippery road surface and or during cornering and or an evasive maneuver the Vehicle Dynamics Control system ad justs the engine s output and th
39. indicator light in the combina tion meter goes off when the cruise control is cancelled To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled and with vehi cle speed of approximately 20 mph 32 km h or more push the control lever up ward in the RES ACC direction to return to the original cruising speed automatical The set indicator light in the combina tion meter will automatically come on at this time E To turn off the cruise control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control e Push the main switch again e Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position but only when the vehi cle is completely stopped E To change the cruising speed V To increase the speed by control le ver CANCEL A RES ACC GES YSET COAST 300334 Push the control lever upward in the RES ACC direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed Then release the control lever The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph 6 8 km h the set speed can be increased 1 mph 1 6 km h each time by pressing the control lever upward in the RES ACC direction quickly within 0 25 second V To increase the speed by accelera tor pedal 1 Depress the accelerator pedal to accel erate the vehicle t
40. of approximately 10 with no loss of sound quality meaning that the audio on 10 con ventional CDs can be fitted onto a single CD R or CD RW assuming a bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz NOTE e MP3 encoding and writing software is not supplied with the audio system e CD writing software is not supplied with the audio system E Creating MP3 files e To create a high quality MP3 file it is advisable to have a high bit rate 128 kbps or higher and a high sampling frequency e Ifa file is created with a variable bit rate VBR the elapsed time during playback may not be displayed correctly and the sound may skip e The sound quality during playback de pends upon the encoder and bit rate De Audio 5 25 tailed information can be found in the us ers manuals for encoder software and writing software e A fixed bit rate of 128 kbps or higher is recommended E Saving MP3 files on a disc e Do not save any non MP3 file on a disc Also do not save any unnecessary folders on a disc e f many folders and or non MP3 files are saved on a disc a delay will be caused be fore playback begins e If a disc contains both Compact Disc Digital Audio CD DA files and MP3 files the system will play only the CD DA files e Add the extension MP3 to the name of every MP3 file The system will not play any file that has either no extension or an extension other than MP3 e Do not add th
41. on hot or sunny days the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly be come high enough to cause se vere or possibly fatal injuries to them Do not park the vehicle over flam mable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags as they may burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust sys tem parts Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide CO contained in the exhaust gas CONTINUED 7 26 Starting and operating e Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause unnecessary wear on the brake linings Before starting to drive always make sure that the parking brake has been fully re leased Never drive with your foot on the parking brake pedal 700327 To set the parking brake hold down the brake pedal while pushing the parking brake pedal as far as it will go 700319 To release the parking brake hold down the brake pedal while pushing the parking brake pedal and slowly releasing it When the parking brake is set while the engine is running the parking brake warn ing light comes on After starting the vehi cle be sure that the warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven Re fer to the Warning and indicator lights section chapter 3 When parking your vehicle always set the par
42. position V To eject a disc from the player When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in the player press the eject but ton amp 8 The disc will be ejected NOTE e Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out because vibration might make it fall out e If the disc is left ejected for more than approximately 15 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position a disc protection func CONTINUED 5 12 Audio tion will operate automatically reload ing the disc In this case the disc is not played V Display selection MP3 disc If you press the AUDIO button 3 for 0 5 second or longer during playback the in dication will change to the next one in the following sequence File titte gt Time L Folder title _ V Page track folder title scroll MP3 disc If having pressed the AUDIO button 3 to select track title or folder title display you press the AUDIO button again for less than 0 5 second the title will be scrolled so you can see all of it You will see eight characters at a time NOTE The display is designed to show titles for up to three pages 64 characters in total Type B audio set if equipped The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON positions E Radio operation 500207 Audio 5 13 1 AM button
43. pulled out from the retractor espe cially when inserting the connec tor s tongue plate into the mating buckle on right hand side always check that the webbing is not twist ed 100377 Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt with the connector s tongue plate not fastened to the connec tor s buckle on the right hand side it cannot properly restrain the wear er in position in an accident possi bly resulting in serious injury or death mm en Center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceiling 1 Remove the connector tongue plate from the slot located at the front of the re cess by pulling the connector tongue plate rearward Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 23 100379 2 Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead retractor 100678 3 After confirming that the webbing is not twisted insert the connector tongue at tached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right hand side until a click is heard CONTINUED 1 24 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags Make sure that the W mark on the connector tongue and the A mark on the buckle are aligned If the belt stops before reaching the buck le return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly If the belt still cannot be un locked let the belt retract slightly after giv ing
44. signed to activate in minor frontal im pacts in minor side impacts or rear im pacts or in roll over accidents e The seatbelt pretensioners for the driver s seat and front passenger s seat operate at the same time as the frontal and side SRS airbags e Pretensioners are designed to func tion on a one time only basis In the event that a pretensioner is activated both the driver s and front passenger s seatbelt retractor assemblies must be replaced and only by an authorized SUBARU dealer When replacing seat belt retractor assemblies use only genuine SUBARU parts e If either front seatbelt does not re tract or cannot be pulled out due to a Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 27 malfunction or activation of the preten sioner contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible e If the front seatbelt retractor assem bly or surrounding area has been dam aged contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible e When you sell your vehicle we urge you to explain to the buyer that it has seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him to the contents of this section e To obtain maximum protection occupants should sit in an upright position with their seatbelts prop erly fastened Refer to Seatbelts section in this chapter Do not modify remove or strike the front seatbelt retractor assem blies or surrounding area This could result in accidental activa tion of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the sy
45. so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a re sult of deployment The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passenger s SRS frontal airbag are de signed to deploy in the event of an acci dent involving a moderate to severe fron tal collision It is basically not designed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone Also they are basi cally not designed to deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll over accidents because deployment of only the driver s SRS fron tal airbag or both driver s and front pas sengers SRS frontal airbags would not help the occupant in those situations The driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbags are designed to function on a one time only basis SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passen ger compartment during a collision That level differs from one type of collision to another and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle it self V Examples of accident in which the driver s driver s and front passen ger s SRS frontal airbag s will most likely deploy 100535 A head on collision against a thick con crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph 20 to 30 km h or higher activates only the driver s SRS frontal airbag or both driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbags The airbag s will also be activat
46. tall buildings and hills V Selecting preset stations Presetting a station with a preset button allows you to select that station in a single operation Up to six AM FM1 and FM2 stations each may be preset Vv How to preset stations 1 Press the FM 2 or AM 1 button to select FM1 FM2 or AM reception 2 Press the SCAN button 7 or tune the radio manually until the desired station frequency is displayed 3 Press one of the preset buttons for more than 1 5 seconds to store the fre quency If the button is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds the preceding selection will remain in memory NOTE e If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal all stations stored in the pre set buttons are cleared If this occurs it is necessary to reset the preset but tons e If a cell phone is placed near the ra dio it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls This noise does not indicate a radio fault V Rear seat entertainment If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear Seat Entertainment System you can en joy audio outputs from the system through the vehicle s speakers by pressing the RSE AUX button Press the button again to return to the audio set sound E Built in CD changer operation 4 5 6 7 500208 Audio 5 17 1 CD button 2 TUNE TRACK button 3 AUDIO but
47. 000111 Temperature gauge page 3 8 Tachometer page 3 7 Speedometer page 3 6 Fuel gauge page 3 8 Trip meter and odometer page 3 6 page 3 7 Trip meter A B selection and trip meter reset knob page 3 7 Selector lever Gear position indicator page 3 20 E Warning and indicator light 19 Mark Name Page 7 Drivers seatbelt warn E ing light li z Front passenger s PASS A seatbelt warning light ot AIR SRS airbag system 3 11 BAG warning light CHECK ENGINE AChE warning light Malfunc 3 12 tion indicator lamp Charge warning light 3 13 Oil pressure warning 527 light 13 ATOIL AT OIL temperature 3 13 TEMP warning light or ABS warning light 3 15 DRAN OT Brake system warning ight JAS Door open warning Dr light SH Mark AWD R SECURITY O D CRUISE SET SOS Name Low fuel warning light All Wheel Drive warn ing light Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi cator light Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light Traction Control sys tem OFF indicator light Security indicator light Turn signal indicator lights High beam indicator light Front fog light indicator light Cruise control indica tor light Cruise control set indi cator light Headlight indicator light Page 3 17 3 17 3 18 3 18 3 20 3 20 3 20 Mark Name Page i Low tire pressure 3 14 warning light ON Passenger airbag O
48. 17 Trailer towing Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger carrying vehicle Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle s engine drivetrain brakes tires and suspension and has an adverse effect on fuel economy If you do decide to tow a trailer your safe ty and satisfaction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious op eration of your vehicle Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in pur chasing a hitch and other necessary tow ing equipment appropriate for your vehi cle In addition be sure to follow the in structions on correct installation and use provided by the trailer and other towing equipment manufacturers SUBARU assumes no responsibility for in juries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment or from any er rors or omissions in the instructions ac companying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions E Warranties and maintenance SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehi cle damage or malfunction caused by trail er towing If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer more frequent maintenance will be CONTINUED 8 18 Driving tips required due to the additional load Refer to Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new pow
49. 2 FM button 3 AUX RSE button 4 TUNE TRACK button 5 Power switch volume control dial 6 SEEK FLDR button 7 SCAN button 8 TONE BAL button 9 Preset button YV Power switch and volume control The dial 5 is used for both power ON OFF and volume control The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial The dial can also be used for tone and balance adjustment V Tone and balance control The volume control dial 5 normally func tions as a volume control This dial be comes a control for Bass Midrange Tre ble Fader or Balance when you select the appropriate tone and balance control mode Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume control dial The control function returns to volume control mode after approximately 5 sec onds CONTINUED 5 14 Audio V To change tone and balance control modes Each brief press of the TONE BAL but ton 8 changes control modes in the fol lowing sequence starting from volume control mode When the radio is first turned on the control mode is in the vol ume control Volume gt Bass gt Midrange VOLUME BASS MIDDLE Balance Fader Treble BALANCE FADER TREBLE The TONE BAL button is used for select ing the following control modes Control mode Range of levels 500204 Turn counterclockwise For less bass sound Turn cloc
50. 700317 CONTINUED 7 22 Starting and operating ing that the Traction Control system is not operating It comes on in the event of a malfunction in the system and is illuminat ed whenever the system is not operating V Vehicle Dynamics Control warning The warning light comes on when the igni tion switch is turned to the ON position and goes off several seconds after engine startup This lighting pattern indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating normally The following situations could indicate a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Con trol system if any should occur we rec ommend that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of the system at the first available opportuni ty e The warning light does not turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON posi tion e The warning light turns on while the ve hicle is being driven e When a malfunction has occurred in the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical sys tem only the warning light will turn on In such an event the ABS will still be operat ing normally e The warning light will also turn on when a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic control sys tems Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control system controls each brake through the ABS whenever the ABS stops operating due to a malfunction in that electrical sys tem the Vehicle Dynamics Control will also become unable to
51. CD player If you insert a DualDisc into the player the disc may not come out again possibly causing the player to malfunc tion e In cold and or rainy weather dew can form inside the CD player preventing nor mal operation If this happens eject the CD and wait for the player to dry out e Skipping may occur when the CD player is subjected to severe vibration for exam ple when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface e To remove a disc from the case press the center of the case and hold both edg es of the disc If the disc surface is touched directly contamination could cause poor tone quality Do not touch the disc surface e Use a clean disc whenever possible If there are deposits wipe the disc surface from the center outward with a dry soft cloth Be sure not to use a hard cloth thin ner benzene alcohol etc e Do not use any disc that is scratched deformed or cracked Also do not use any disc that has a non standard shape for example a heart shape Malfunctions or problems might result e Adisc is vulnerable to heat Never keep it either in places exposed to direct sun light near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or on hot days 500034 MP3 audio E What is MP3 MP3 the name is an abbreviation of MPEG Audio Layer 3 is a compression format for digital audio It was developed by the Motion Picture Experts Group It permits audio data to be shrunk by a factor
52. E E T EE 1 11 AT OIL TEMPerature warning light 00 ee 3 13 Audi control inte EE 5 22 ee EE 5 3 Auto dimming mirror COMpPaSS seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 34 Automatic climate control system eeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 5 Automatic TRANSMISSION genee Een 7 8 CAPAC ISS tee ege 12 3 Elei cheb tact neater ate elie A State geg 11 15 Mantial Fleur 7 11 Selector lever EEN 7 9 Shift lock release AAA 7 14 Temperature warning light AT OIL TEMP 3 13 Automatic Emergency Locking Retractor A ELR 1 16 B GE 11 35 J mp SLANTING EE EE 9 11 Replacement Remote keyless entry system 2 10 Brake BOOSIOR aochit E E EEA E ENEA 11 21 e 7 DEE 11 20 Pad arid lining RE 11 22 Pedal eebe 11 21 Brake pedal FRSC E 11 21 Reserve distance eee ccccccecceeeccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeaneeeees 11 21 Brake system E 7 15 Warning e EE 3 16 BAKING EE 7 15 Breaking in of new brake pads and linings 11 22 BR Te 7 15 Bulb E EE 12 8 FRED AC ING fatty EE 11 39 CG REN 12 3 Cargo area el 6 2 TE GOWN e 6 12 RE ele EE 8 3 Center CONSOLE EE 6 5 TEE 4 4 Changing et Ehe 9 7 Oil and Be Uu EE 11 7 Charge warning light ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeaeees 3 13 CHECK ENGINE warning light Malfunction indicator rue EEN 3 12 Checking Brake pedal free play EEN 11 21 Brake pedal reserve distance
53. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sud den braking or in a collision Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages LATCH e Child restraint systems and seat belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle Unsecured child restraint sys tems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop turn or accident they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child When you install a child restraint system follow the manufacturer s instructions supplied with it After installing the child restraint system check to ensure that it is held se curely in position If it is not held tight and secure the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in creased Some types of child restraint systems can be installed in a rear seating position of your vehicle without use of the seatbelts Such child restraint systems are secured to the dedicated anchorages provided on the vehicle body The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes referred to as the LATCH sys tem Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil dren 100515 Your vehicle is provided with child
54. Random playback will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps e Press the RPT button e Press the SCAN button e Press the A button e Select the radio mode e Press the RSE AUX button H Di e Press the yv or a side of the SEEK FLDR button e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position V MP3 disc Press the RDM button 5 during disc playback to play all of the tracks in the folder currently being played in random or der Press the RDM button again to play all of the tracks on the disc in random or der The display will show RDM during the random mode To cancel the random mode press the RDM button during in disc random playback The RDM indication will go off and the normal playback mode will be re sumed NOTE e Each time you briefly press the but ton the mode will change to the next one in the following sequence In folder random __ In disc random playback playback Lo Anoe If you accidentally press the button and cancel the random mode press it again to reselect the random mode e Random playback will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps e Press the RPT button e Press the SCAN button e Press the A button e Select the radio mode e Press the RSE AUX button e Press the y or a side of the S
55. Steering fluid cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 11 19 Checking the fluid level ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 19 Recommended fluid 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 19 Brak fl id ee 11 20 Checking the fluid level cccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 20 Recommended brake fluid seeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 20 Brake booster ee ee 11 21 TE H TEE 11 21 Checking the brake pedal free play 11 21 Checking the brake pedal reserve distance 11 21 Replacement of brake pad and lining 11 22 Breaking in of new brake pads and linings 11 22 Parking brake Stroke ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 23 Tires ANd wheels cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesens 11 23 Types OF HEES ee 11 23 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 11 23 Tire inspection ere 11 25 Tire pressures and wear ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 25 Wheel balance fociscsscesccsscesccnscecvcesecesessptaceaasnansaesseesce 11 27 Wear indicators ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 27 Tire rotation RE 11 28 Tire replacement vsisi snieni niinn aat 11 28 Wheel replacement esseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 29 Aluminum wheels ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenes 11 29 Maintenance and service Windshield washer fluid sesssseeeeeeeeeeees 11 30 Replacement of wiper blades
56. Under floor storage compartment HomeLink Wireless Control System if equipped RE Interior equipment Garage door opener programming in the USS PS Secs A PEA E E E ead ceteneseecacennataezetlews Programming rolling code protected garage door openers in the U S A REENEN Programming for entrance gates and garage door openers in Canada ccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeeees Programming other devices EEN Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control SV SUCIN esoe Ee E EE EE Reprogramming a single HomeLink button Erasing HomeLink button memory e In case a problem Occurs een 6 14 6 15 6 2 Interior equipment Interior light When leaving your vehicle make sure the light is turned off to avoid battery dis charge E Dome light 600403 Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment 600404 Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertain ment The light switch has three positions 1 The light stays on continuously 2 The light comes on when any door is opened The light remains on for several seconds and gradually goes out after all doors are closed The light also can be turned on by use of the remote keyless entry transmitter See the Remote keyless entry system in chapter 2 for detailed information The setting of the period for which the light stays on can be changed by a SUBARU dealer Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details 3 The light stays off
57. Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes un able to provide ABS control As a result the Vehicle Dynamics Control system also becomes inoperative causing the warning light to come on Though both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and ABS systems are inoperative in this case the ordinary func tions of the brake system are still avail able You will be safe while driving with this condition but have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible NOTE If the warning light behavior is as shown in the following the Vehicle Dy namics Control system may be consid ered normal e The warning light comes on right af ter the engine is started but goes out immediately remaining off e The warning light comes on after en gine startup and goes off while the ve hicle is subsequently being driven e The warning light comes on during driving but it goes out immediately and remains off V Traction Control system OFF indica tor light e t comes on when the Traction Control system OFF switch is pressed e It also comes on when the Traction Control system is deactivated NOTE e The light may stay on for a while after the engine has been started especially in cold weather This does not indicate the existence of a problem The light should go out as soon as the engine has warmed up e The indicator light comes on when the engine has developed a problem and the Malfunction indicator light is on The Vehicle Dyn
58. _ fuel con sumption sumption Journey time lt Driving range on remaining fuel Press the INFO button for more than 1 second to turn off the display The display will turn on again if you press either the INFO button or AUDIO button E Current fuel consumption MPG LL a 300554 U S spec vehicles LEE L 100km 300555 Canada spec vehicles This indication shows the rate of fuel con Instruments and controls 3 23 sumption at the present moment E Average fuel consumption TRIPQY AVG E 3 MPG LL 300556 U S spec vehicles CONTINUED 3 24 Instruments and controls L 100km 300557 Canada spec vehicles This indication shows the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica tion between the average fuel consump tion corresponding to the A trip meter indi cation and the average fuel consumption corresponding to the B trip meter indica tion When either of the trip meter indications is reset the corresponding average fuel consumption value is also reset NOTE e The indicated values vary in accor dance with changes in the vehicle s running conditions Also the indicated values may differ slightly from the ac tual values and should thus be treated only as a guide e When either trip meter indication is reset the average fue
59. a screwdriver into the hole 5 Push down on the screwdriver and move the selector lever from the P to the N position while pressing the release button 6 Remove the screwdriver from the hole Depress the brake pedal and start the en gine Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the system re paired Power steering Braking Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or right for more than five seconds This may damage the power steering pump The power steering system operates only when the engine is running If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system fails to function you can steer but it will take much more effort NOTE Right after the engine has been started and before it has warmed up you may hear a noise coming from areas adja cent to the power steering pump which is located at the right front area of the engine compartment This noise is nor mal It does not indicate power steering system trouble E Braking tips Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads and linings Vv When the brakes get wet When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle the brakes may get wet As a re sult brake stopping distance will be long er To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly
60. an automatic belt tension adjuster However replacement of the belt should be done according to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement If a belt is loose cracked or worn contact your SUBARU dealer E Checking the fluid level The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature rises the fluid level differs according to fluid tempera ture Therefore there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid on the dipstick Though the fluid level can be checked without warming up the fluid on the COLD range we recommend checking the fluid level when the fluid is at operating temperature V Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot Check the fluid level monthly 1 Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature 158 to 176 F 70 to 80 C is normal 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake 3 First shift the selector lever in each po sition Then shift it in the P position and run the engine at idling speed Maintenance and service 1 1 1 5 1 Yellow handle B00316 1 HOT range 2 COLD range 3 Upper level 4 Lower level CONTINUED 1 1 1 6 Maintenance and service 4 Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the gauge If it is below t
61. and make sure the seatback is securely locked in position E Folding down the seatback e After returning the seat to its orig inal position be certain to place all of the seatbelts and the tab at tached to the seat cushion above the seat cushion And make cer tain that the shoulder belts are ful ly visible Never allow passengers to ride on the folded seatback or in the car go area Doing so may result in se rious injury or death Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 13 100369 Place the head restraint in its lowest posi tion pull up the lever to release the seat back lock and fold down the seatback To return the seatback to its original posi tion raise the seatback until it locks into place Make sure it is securely locked CONTINUED 1 14 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags NOTE 100647 1 Holder e Before folding or raising the seat back of the third row seat confirm that the seatbelt is flat against the sidewall at the lower point and the webbing is attached to the holder e When raising the seatback of the third row seat if the seatbelt catches on the seatback hold the belt forward of the seatback while latching the seat back E Head restraint adjustment Nev
62. and must be replaced immediately With a tire in this condi tion driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hy droplane Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an acci dent e To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly it is best to rotate the tires every 7 500 miles 12 500 km Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right hand side of the ve hicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left hand side of the vehicle Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle Re place any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation After tire ro tation adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correct ly tightened A tightening torque spec ification and a tightening sequence specification for the wheel nuts can be found Flat tires in chapter 9 CONTINUED 13 8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects E Vehicle load limit how to de termine The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight not by avail able cargo space The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver s side B pillar Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard The vehicle placard also shows seat ing capacity of your vehicle The total l
63. and operating 7 5 der federal law to implement stricter vehi cle emission standards to reduce air pollu tion from vehicles A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller like testing device that allows your vehicle s wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place Depend ing on the severity of a state s air pollution problems the states must adopt either a basic or enhanced vehicle emission in spection test Normally a portion of the basic emission test consists of an emis sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle for a short period of time States with more severe air pollution problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test This test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits more accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution than the basic emission test The U S Environmental Protection Agen cy EPA and states using two wheel dy namometers in their emission testing pro grams have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two wheel dyna mometer There are some states that use four wheel dynamometers in their testing programs When properly used that equipment will not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle CONTINUED 7 6 Starting and operating Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground nor should the driveshaft be disconnected for state em
64. and sounding a chime O D 100372 Driver s warning light 100373 Front passenger s warning light V Operation If the driver and or front passenger have has not yet fastened the seatbelt s when the ignition switch is turned to the ON po sition the seatbelt warning light s will flash for 6 seconds to warn that the seat belt s is are unfastened If the drivers seatbelt is not fastened a chime will also sound simultaneously If the drivers and or front passenger s seatbelt s are is still not fastened 6 sec onds later both warning lights or the warning light for the unfastened seatbelt will remain lit for 15 seconds If the driver s and or front passenger s seatbelt s are is still not fastened even 15 seconds later 21 seconds after turning ON the ignition switch the warning lights will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15 second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light s is are flashing Alternate flashing and steady illumination of the warning lights and sounding of the chime will continue until both driver and front passenger fasten their seatbelts NOTE e If the driver and or front passenger unfasten s the seatbelt s after fasten ing the seatbelt warning device oper ates as follows according to the vehi cle speed e At speeds lower than approximate ly 9 mph 15 km h The warning light s for unfastened seatbelt s
65. battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is ground ed 2 If the booster battery is in another vehi cle do not let the two vehicles touch 3 Turn off all unnecessary lights and ac cessories 4 Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated 900216 In case of emergency 9 13 1 Connect one jumper cable to the pos itive terminal on the discharged bat tery 2 Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery 3 Connect one end of the other cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery 4 Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal CONTINUED 9 144 in case of emergency 5 Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed Then start the engine of the vehi cle that has the discharged battery 6 When finished carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order Engine overheating Never attempt to remove the radia tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down When the engine is hot the coolant is under pressure Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant which could burn you very seriously If the engine o
66. beginning with leftmost digit NOTE If you do not start entering the number using the lock knob before the elec tronic tone stops sounding an error will occur In this event perform the procedure again beginning with part 3 9 When you have finished entering the code a second time an electronic tone will sound for one second and automatic door locking and unlocking operation will take CONTINUED 2 14 Keys and doors place once to indicate completion of regis tration provided the code entered the sec ond time is identical to that entered the first time NOTE If the code entered the second time is not identical to the code entered the first time an error will occur In this event perform the procedure again be ginning with part 5 If an error occurs five times perform the procedure again starting with part 3 10 If you wish to program another trans mitter code into the system up to four transmitter codes can be programmed into the system perform the procedure beginning with part 4 When you have fin ished programming all of the necessary transmitter codes into the system remove the key from the ignition switch 11 Test every registered transmitter to confirm correct operation V Deleting old transmitter codes The control unit of the keyless entry sys tem has four memory locations to store transmitter codes giving it the ability to operate with up to four transmitters When you lose a tran
67. braking force It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicle s loading condition and speed The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS system and uses some of the ABS system s components to perform its func tion of optimizing the distribution of brak ing force If any of the ABS components used by the EBD function fails the EBD system also stops working When the EBD system is operating you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction E Steps to take if EBD system fails BRAKE ABS 700315 If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system the system stops working and the brake system warning light and ABS warning light come on simultaneously The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driv ing Even if the EBD system fails the conven tional braking system will still function However the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are ap plied harder than usual and the vehicle s motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously take the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe flat place 2 Shut down the engine then restart it 3 Release the par
68. button the play er will enter standby mode Press the CD button to start playback V Loading all the magazine Full disc loading mode 1 If you continue to press the LOAD button 10 for more than 1 5 seconds the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc loading mode 2 A disc number indicator will blink and ALL LOAD will be on display for a period of 15 seconds If a disc is successfully loaded during this period the disc number indicator will stop blinking and will steadily light 3 When the loading of a disc is complete the next disc number indicator will blink Then repeat Step 2 4 When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating Steps 2 and 3 the player will start playback of the discs beginning with the one inserted first If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 seconds interval the full disc loading mode will be canceled and the player will start playback of the disc inserted first V How to play back a CD or make a pause V When there is no CD inserted Insert a CD by referring to How to insert a CD s When a CD is loaded the player will start playback of the CD beginning with the first track V When there are CDs loaded Press a desired one of the disc select but tons 9 the disc number indicator of which steadily lights up The player will then start playback of the selected CD beginning with the first track If a disc that
69. control all four brakes Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control system operation halts and the warning light turns on Although both the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the ABS will be inoperable in this situation it will still be possible to stop the vehicle using normal braking The Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the ABS do not ad versely affect operation of the vehicle in any way when they are inoperable how ever should such a situation occur drive with care and have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of those systems at the first available oppor tunity NOTE When the warning light turns on and off in the following way it indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys tem is operating normally e Although turning on after the engine has been started the warning light quickly turns off and stays off e The warning light turns on when the vehicle is being driven it then turns off and stays off V Traction Control system OFF indica tor light This light comes on to indicate that the Traction Control system is in non opera tion mode This does not constitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system NOTE e The indicator light may stay on for a while after the engine has been started especially in cold weather This occurs because the engine has not yet warmed up and is completely normal The light will turn off when the engine has reached a suitable operating tem perature e Whe
70. defroster VY Fan speed control dial 400512 The fan speed control dial has 7 positions AUTO position and 6 different fan speed positions The fan speed is shown on the center of the dial With the fan speed control dial in the AUTO position the fan speed changes automatically corresponding the various conditions air temperature inside and out side of the passengers compartment in tensity of the sunlight etc Climate control 4 7 YV A C Air conditioner button 400513 If the windshield starts to fog when the cli mate control system is operated in the AUTO mode push the air conditioner but ton to defog and dehumidify When this button is pushed the air condi tioner compressor turns on and the indica tor light on the button comes on After eliminating the fogging from the wind shield set the system back to the AUTO mode by pushing the AUTO button NOTE The air conditioner compressor does not operate when the outside air tem perature is below 32 F 0 C CONTINUED 4 8 Climate control V Air flow mode selection button 400514 Select the desired air flow mode by push ing the air flow mode selection button The selected air flow mode is shown on the the center of the dial 34 Ventilation Air flows through the in strument panel outlets GZ Bi level Air flows through the instru ment panel outlets and the foot outlets if Heat Air fl
71. depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes V Use of engine braking Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking When descend ing a grade if only the foot brake is used the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating caused by overheated brake pads To help prevent this shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking V Braking when a tire is punctured Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly Starting and operating 7 15 when a tire is punctured This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle Keep driv ing straight ahead while gradually reduc ing speed Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place E Brake system Vv Two separate circuits Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake sys tem Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle If one circuit of the brake sys tem should fail the other half of the sys tem still works If one circuit fails the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and you will need to press it down much harder And a much longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle V Brake booster The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking force If engine manifold vacuum becomes insufficient such as when driving in a high altitude place a vacuum pump assures a suffi cient vacuum to operate the brake boost er Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off th
72. each may be preset Vv How to preset stations 1 Press the FM 2 or AM 1 button to select FM1 FM2 or AM reception 2 Press the SCAN button 7 or tune the radio manually until the desired station frequency is displayed 3 Press one of the preset buttons 9 for more than 1 5 seconds to store the fre quency If the button is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds the preceding selection will remain in memory NOTE e If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal all stations stored in the pre set buttons are cleared If this occurs it is necessary to reset the preset but tons e If a cell phone is placed near the ra dio it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls This noise does not indicate a radio fault V Rear seat entertainment If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear Audio 5 7 Seat Entertainment System you can en joy audio outputs from the system through the vehicle s speakers by pressing the RSE AUX button Press the button again to return to the audio set sound CONTINUED 5 8 Audio Compact disc player operation 4 5 6 7 500205 1 CD button 2 TUNE TRACK button 3 AUDIO button 4 SEEK FLDR button 5 RDM button 6 RPT button 7 SCAN button 8 Eject button V To playback a compact disc V When CD is not in the player
73. equip ment Replacement wheels are available from SUBARU dealers Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle Wheels not meeting specifications could in terfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well housing dur ing turns The resulting loss of vehi cle control could lead to an acci dent Maintenance and service 1 1 29 Aluminum wheels Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance performance and safety e When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles 1 000 km If any nut is loose tight en it to the specified torque e Never apply oil to the threaded parts wheel nuts or tapered surface of the wheel e Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs e Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel e When wheel nuts balance weights or the center cap is replaced be sure to re place them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for aluminum wheels 1 1 30 Maintenance and service Windshield washer fluid AXCAUTION Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause paint damage 300544 If you spray washer fluid on the windshield but the wind
74. for both power ON OFF and volume control The radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is controlled by turning the dial The dial can also be used for tone and balance adjustment V Tone and balance control The volume control dial 5 normally func tions as a volume control This dial be comes a control for Bass Midrange Tre ble Fader or Balance when you select the appropriate tone and balance control mode Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume control dial The control function returns to volume control mode after approximately 5 sec onds V To change tone and balance control modes Each brief press of the TONE BAL but ton 8 changes control modes in the fol lowing sequence starting from volume control mode When the radio is first turned on the control mode is in the vol ume control Volume gt Bass gt Midrange VOLUME BASS MIDDLE Balance Fader Treble BALANCE FADER TREBLE The TONE BAL button is used for select ing the following control modes Audio 5 5 CONTINUED 5 6 Audio Control mode Range of levels Bass control 6 to 6 Midrange control 6 to 6 Turn counterclockwise For less bass sound For less midrange sound 500204 Turn clockwise For more bass sound For more midrange sound Treble control 6 to 6 Fader control R9 to F9 Balance control
75. for the ball mount and your trailer The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount 6 Connect your trailer to the hitch ball 7 Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailer s maximum gross weight The chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into ac count however be careful not to let them drag on the ground 800209 Do not connect safety chains to part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks 800210 Hitch harness connector 8 Connect the hitch wire harness s black four pin wire connector to the towing trail er s wire harness 9 Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake right turn signal left turn signal stop and parking lights on the trailer NOTE Always disconnect the trailer wire har ness before launching or retrieving a watercraft E When you do not tow a trailer e Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube e Place the dust cap over the four pin connector of the hitch wire harness to pro tect against possible damage e Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four pin connector using the terminal grease Driving tips 8
76. height push the release button and slide the anchor down To raise the anchor height slide the an chor up Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 21 When wearing the seatbelts make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck If it does adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision V Unfastening the seatbelt 100105 Push the button on the buckle Before closing the door make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door CONTINUED 1 22 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags NOTE 1 Holder With the seatback folded attach the tongue plate of each rear second row seatbelt to the corresponding holder Do the same also before someone gets into the third row seat V Rear center seatbelt 5 seater mod els second row center seatbelt 7 seater models 100376 1 Center seatbelt tongue plate 2 Connector tongue 3 Connector buckle 4 Center seatbelt buckle 100108 Fastening the seatbelt with the web bing twisted can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident When fastening the belt after it is
77. horn sounds once indi cating that the system is now activated NOTE You may have the above setting change done by your SUBARU dealer E if you have accidentally trig gered the alarm system V To stop the alarm Do any of the following operations e Press any button on the remote trans mitter e Turn the ignition switch to the ON po sition E Arming the system Vv To arm the system using remote transmitter 1 Close all windows and the moonroof 2 Remove the key from the ignition switch 3 Open the doors and get out of the vehi cle 4 Make sure that the engine hood is locked 5 Close all doors and the rear gate Keys and doors 2 15 200918 H Press to Arm the system gd Press to Disarm the system 200702 6 Briefly press the button for less than two seconds All doors and the rear gate will lock an electronic chirp will CONTINUED 2 16 Keys and doors sound once the turn signal lights will flash once and the indicator lights will start flashing rapidly After rapid flashing for 30 seconds standby time the indicator lights will then flash slowly twice approxi mately every two seconds indicating that the system has been armed for surveil lance If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed an electronic chirp sounds five times the turn signal lights flash five times to alert you that the doors
78. in the P position and then placed again in the N position When movement of the se lector lever from the N position to the R position has become impossible turn the ignition switch back to the ON position then move the selector lever to the P po sition Pressing the selector lever release button also makes it possible to move the selector lever to the P position at this time Vv Selector lever release button 700306 If you inadvertently have turned the igni tion switch to the OFF position with the selector lever in the N position proceed as follows By referring to the Shift lock release section in this chapter remove the cover Then with a screwdriver insert ed into the hole move the selector lever to the P position while pressing the release button If the selector lever reverse inhibit ing function fails have the vehicle inspect ed by the nearest SUBARU dealer E Selection of manual mode 700307 With the vehicle either moving or station ary move the selector lever from the D position to the manual gate then move it to the end or end of the manual gate to select manual mode Starting and operating 7 11 700308 1 Upshift indicator 2 Downshift indicator 3 Gear position indicator When the manual mode is selected the gear position indicator and upshift indica tor and or downshift ind
79. injury e Flashing or flickering of the warn ing light CONTINUED 3 1 2 Instruments and controls e No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position e Continuous warning light e Illumination of the warning light while driving illumination of the E Front passenger s frontal air bag ON and OFF indicators PASS AIR BAG iid oN We TH S G 100533 ON V Se Front passenger s frontal airbag ON indicator Front passenger s frontal airbag OFF indicator The front passenger s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag The indicators are located in the center portion of the dashboard When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position both the ON and OFF indi cators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked Follow ing the system check both indicators ex tinguish for 2 seconds After that one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system monitor ing If the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag is activated the passenger s frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain extinguished If the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag is deactivated the passenger s frontal
80. is below the bottom edge of the hole add oil through the filler hole to raise the level e Be careful not to spill rear differ ential gear oil when adding it If rear differential gear oil touches the exhaust pipe it may cause a bad smell smoke and or a fire If rear differential gear oil gets on the exhaust pipe be sure to wipe it off e If the vehicle requires frequent re filling there may be an oil leak If you suspect a problem have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer E Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives Never use different brands together Oil grade API classification GL 5 C 30 20 10 0O 10 20 30 40 B00032 SAE viscosity No and applicable tem perature Power steering fluid E Checking the fluid level B00321 AAWARNING Be careful not to burn yourself be cause the fluid may be hot e When power steering fluid is be ing added use only clean fluid and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank And never use dif ferent brands together e Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank e Be careful not to spill power steer ing fluid when adding it If power steering fluid touches the exhaust pipe it may cause a bad smell smoke and or a fire If power steering fluid gets on the exhaust pipe be sure to wipe it off The power steering fluid expands greatly as i
81. it a strong pull then pull it out slowly again 100114 4 Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate in the center seatbelt buckle marked CENTER on the left hand side until it clicks N NAG we Sech 5 100310 5 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt And place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips not on your waist V Unfastening the seatbelt F 100116 Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle on the left hand side to unfasten the seatbelt 100381 100382 1 Insert a key or other hard pointed ob ject into the slot in the connector buckle on the right hand side and push it in and the connector tongue plate will discon nect from the buckle 200300 2 With the belt held by hand allow the re tractor to roll up the belt slowly You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess on the ceiling and then insert the connec tor tongue plate into the slot located at the front of the recess 100383 e Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly Other wise the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim resulting in damaged trim Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neat ly stored A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim during driving c
82. latch the lock 7 Reinstall the rear combination light as sembly E Backup light Tail light B00350 1 Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the light cover from the rear gate trim B00351 1 Tail light 2 Backup light Maintenance and service 1 1 43 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it 3 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one 4 Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise Install the light cover on the rear gate E Rear gate light B00350 1 Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the rear gate light assembly from the rear gate trim CONTINUED 1 1 44 Maintenance and service B00352 2 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one 3 Install the rear gate light assembly on the rear gate E License plate light 1 Remove the mounting screws using a Phillips screwdriver 2 Remove the lens B00354 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket Install a new bulb 4 Reinstall the lens and cover 5 Tighten the mounting screws E Dome light B00355 Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment 700083 Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertain ment 1 Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat head screwdriver 700084 2 Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at its ends are aligned vertically Pull the bulb straigh
83. loss of vehicle control e driving up or down a steep grade e driving on slippery or winding roads e driving in heavy traffic E To set cruise control _ CANCEL A RES ACC CRUISE YSET COAST 300332 1 Push the main switch button 700322 The CRUISE indicator light on the com bination meter will come on 2 Depress the accelerator pedal until the Starting and operating 7 27 vehicle reaches the desired speed CANCEL A RES ACC CRUISE Y SET COAST 300333 3 Push the control lever downward in the SET COAST direction and release it Then release the accelerator pedal ge 700323 At this time the set indicator light is il luminated in the combination meter CONTINUED 7 28 Starting and operating The vehicle will maintain the desired speed Vehicle speed can be temporarily in creased while driving with the cruise con trol activated Simply depress the acceler ator pedal to accelerate the vehicle When the accelerator pedal is released the ve hicle will return to and maintain the previ ous cruising speed E To temporarily cancel the cruise control There are three ways to cancel the cruise control temporarily 700161 e Pull the control lever in the CANCEL direction e Depress the brake pedal e Shift the selector lever into the N posi tion The set
84. memory to allow the transmission to shift at the most appropriate times for the current con dition of your vehicle Optimized shift ing will be restored as the vehicle con tinues to be driven for a while E Selector lever SE O lt j gt CG o Co SS O4090 L O 700305 gt With the brake pedal depressed shift while pressing the button in m Shift while pressing the button in gt Shift without pressing the button The selector lever has four positions P R N D and also has manual gate for using SPORT mode or manual mode V P Park This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine In this position the transmission is me chanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely When you park the vehicle first set the parking brake fully then shift into the P position Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmission To shift the selector lever from the P to any other position you have to depress the brake pedal fully then push the release button on the selector lever when the igni tion switch is in the ONT position This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started If the shift lever does not move from the P position with the brake pedal de pressed the release button pushed in and the ignition switch in the ON position refer to the Shift lock release sec
85. modules are stored in these areas Under the center console Inside each front fender Steering wheel and column and nearby areas Top of the dashboard on front passenger s side and nearby ar eas Each front seat and nearby area Inside each center pillar In each roof side from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel house on each side In the event that the SRS airbag is de ployed replacement of the system should be performed only by an autho rized SUBARU dealer When the com ponents of the SRS airbag system are replaced use only genuine SUBARU parts NOTE In the following cases contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible e The front part of the vehicle was in volved in an accident in which the only the driver s SRS frontal airbag or both driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbags did not deploy e The pad of the steering wheel the cover over the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag or either roof side from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat is scratched cracked or other wise damaged e Either center pillar and rear wheel house or a nearby area of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy e The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut frayed or otherwise damaged E Precautions against vehicle modification e To avoid acciden
86. not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time either fast or slow e Avoid starting suddenly and rapid accel eration except in an emergency e Avoid hard braking except in an emer gency The same break in procedures should be applied to a newly installed or overhauled engine or when brake pads or brake lin ings are replaced with new ones Fuel economy hints The following suggestions will help to save your fuel e Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions e Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera tion Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed Then try to main tain that speed for as long as possible e Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine e Avoid unnecessary engine idling e Keep the engine properly tuned e Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire placard which is located under the door latch on the driv ers side Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption e Use the air conditioner only when nec essary e Keep the front and rear wheels in prop er alignment e Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo Engine exhaust gas Carbon monoxide e Never inhale engine exhaust gas Engine exhaust gas contains car bon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous or even lethal if inhaled Always properly maintain the en gine exhaust system to prevent engine ex
87. notice E Dimensions in mm Overall length 189 8 4 822 Overall width 73 9 1 878 Overall height 66 4 1 686 Wheel base 108 2 2 749 62 2 1 580 62 1 1 578 Ground clearance 8 4 213 E Engine Engine model EZ30D 3 0 liter DOHC non turbo Engine type Horizontally opposed liquid cooled 6 cylinder 4 stroke gasoline engine Displacement cc cu in 3 000 183 Bore x Stroke in mm 3 51 x 3 15 89 2 x 80 0 Specifications 12 3 E Electrical system Battery type and capacity 5HR 75D23L 12V 52AH Spark plugs ILFR6B NGK E Capacities Engine oil 5 8 US qt 5 5 liters 4 8 Imp qt 10 4 US qt 9 8 liters 8 6 Imp qt Power steering fluid 0 9 US qt 0 9 liter 0 8 Imp qt E Tires Wheel size 18 x 8JJ Pressure 33 psi 230 kPa 2 3 kgf cm CONTINUED 12 4 Specifications E Wheel alignment Tos inom Lee mn Fuses and circuits Specifications 12 5 E Fuse panel located in the passenger compart ment H HERR LJ i d 4 2 4 5 HHH i W EE EH E LJ r 6 7 8 9 11 12 e e mm e E 13014 15 16 18 19 IEP BIR d O O O O ai 20 21 22 23 25 26 ij m 277 28 29 30 32 33 I Ki Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit 1 20A Trailer hitch connector 2 Empty 3 15A Door locking 4 7 5A Front wiper deicer relay
88. nuts and the flat tire Ca 900009 600162 12 Before putting the spare tire on clean the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth 13 Put on the spare tire Replace the wheel nuts Tighten them by hand In case of emergency 9 9 Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident 14 Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle 600192 15 Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque following the tightening order in the illustration The torque for tightening the nuts is 74 to 89 Ibf ft 100 to 120 N m 10 to 12 kgf m This torque is equivalent to applying ap proximately 88 to 110 Ibs 40 to 50 kg at the top of the wheel nut wrench Never CONTINUED 9 10 In case of emergency use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility 900208 Do not use the extension when turn ing the wheel nuts If you did you would not be able to achieve suffi cient tightening torque The wheel nuts could then come loose result ing in a serious accident 16 Store the flat tire in the spare tire hold er Refer to the sections Spare tire in this chapter for its lo
89. of America Inc and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties e SUBARU Limited Warranty e Emission Control Systems Warranty e Emissions Performance Warranty All warranty information including details of coverage and exclusions is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet Please read these warranties carefully V Warranties for Canada All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada Inc and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties e SUBARU Limited Warranty e Anti Corrosion Warranty e Emission Control Warranty All warranty information including details of coverage and exclusions is in the Warranty and Service Booklet Please read these warranties carefully If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system and or Rear Seat Entertainment System the displays contain mercury Therefore the dis plays of the navigation system and or Rear Seat Entertainment System must be removed before vehicle dis posal Once the displays have been removed please reuse recycle or dispose of them as hazardous waste How to use this owner s man ual E Using your Owner s manual Before you operate your vehicle carefully read this manual To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle fol low the instructions in this manual Failure to observe these instructions ma
90. of an accident in creased The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with each differ ent gear When down shifting it is important to con firm that the current vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear which is about to be selected Position mph km h 1 25 40 2 59 95 3 95 153 Never exceed posted speed limits NOTE e In order to prevent over revving dur ing acceleration of the vehicle the transmission will automatically shift to the next highest gear if the Maximum Allowable Speed for the current gear is exceeded e Similarly in order to prevent over revving during deceleration of the vehi cle the transmission will remain in the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear to which the selec tor lever has been moved E Driving tips e On a road surface where there is a risk of wheelspin for example a snow or gravel covered road you can pull away from a standstill safely and easily by first selecting the 2nd gear of the manual mode e Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the D or R position e Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle Do not hold the vehi cle with only the transmission e Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the D position Use the brake instead e The en
91. of the socket Install a CONTINUED 1 1 42 Maintenance and service new bulb 3 Set the bulb socket into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks 4 Install the headlight assembly and the front grille in the reverse order of removal E Front turn signal light B00345 1 Remove the bulb socket from the headlight assembly by turning it counter clockwise B00346 2 Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning counterclockwise Install a new bulb 3 Set the bulb socket into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks 4 Install the headlight assembly and the front grille in the reverse order of removal E Front fog light It may be difficult to replace the bulbs Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary E Rear combination lights B00347 1 Remove the two covers by inserting the tip of a flat head screwdriver B00348 2 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the upper and lower screws B00349 1 Brake tail light 2 Rear turn signal light 3 Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise 4 Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning counterclockwise Install a new bulb 5 Set the bulb holder into the rear combi nation light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks 6 Close the cover and
92. or the rear gate are not properly closed When you close the door the system will auto matically arm and doors will automatically lock V To arm the system using power door locking switches 1 Close all windows 2 Remove the key from the ignition switch 3 Open the doors and get out of the vehi cle 4 Make sure that the engine hood is locked 5 Close the doors and the rear gate but leave only the drivers door or the front passenger s door open 200705 6 Push the front side LOCK side of the power door locking switch to set the door locks 7 Close the door An electronic chirp will sound once the turn signal lights will flash once and the indicator light will start flash ing slowly approximately once every two seconds to inform you that the system has armed NOTE e The system can be armed even if the engine hood the windows and or moonroofs are opened Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system e The 30 second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer Have it per formed by your SUBARU dealer e The system is in the standby mode for a 30 second period after locking the doors with the remote transmitter The security indicator light will flash at short intervals during this period e If any of the following actions is done during the standby period the system will not switch to the surveillance state e Doors are unlocked using the re mote tran
93. out of the vehicle 600122 4 Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire In case of emergency 9 7 900261 7 seater models 1 Jack handle 2 Jack 3 Spare tire CONTINUED 9 8 In case of emergency 7 900262 5 seater models 1 Jack handle 2 Jack 3 Spare tire 5 Take out the jack and jack handle The jack and jack handle are stored under the floor of the cargo area 6 Remove the spare tire Refer to the sections Spare tire in this chapter for its location instructions and precautions Carefully read the section Temporary spare tire in this chapter and strictly fol low the instructions NOTE Make sure the jack is well lubricated before using it 7 Insert the tip wrapped in vinyl tape or a Cloth of a flat head screwdriver into the slot between the wheel and cap Use it to remove the cap 900212 8 Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts 900213 9 Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack up point closest to the flat tire 900214 Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack up point t 900215 10 Insert the jack handle into the jack screw and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary 11 Remove the wheel
94. prevention function does not operate while the key is in the ignition switch Power door locking switches Si 200708 Driver s switch 1 Lock 2 Unlock 200709 Front passenger s switch 1 Lock 2 Unlock All doors and the rear gate can be locked and unlocked by the power door locking switches located at the drivers side and the front passenger s side doors To lock all doors including the rear gate push the side of the switch To unlock all doors including the rear gate push the g side of the switch When you close the doors after you set the door locks the doors remain locked NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the pow er door locking switches E Key lock in prevention func tion This function prevents the doors from be ing locked with the key still in the ignition switch V Behavior with key lock in preven tion function operative With either the driver s or front passen gers door open the doors automatically remain unlocked even if the side of the door locking switch is pushed V Behavior with key lock in preven tion function non operative e H the lock lever is turned to the rear LOCK position with the drivers door open and the driver s door is then closed with the lock lever in that position the driv er s door is locked e f the spa
95. re straint system anchors as follows e Four lower anchorages bars and three upper anchorages tether anchorages on the rear seat 5 seater model second row seat 7 seater model 100516 Lower anchorages for child restraints are provided in the following locations e 5 seater models on the rear seats e 7 seater models on the second row seats For each window side seating position two lower anchorages are provided Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 39 Ak TOP TETHER 100523 The tether anchorages upper anchorag es are provided for all the seating posi tions of the rear seat 5 seater models second row seat 7 seater models On each outboard rear second row seat you will find marks O at the bottom of CONTINUED 1 40 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags the seatback Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback When you install a child restraint system follow the manufacturer s instructions supplied with it After installing the child restraint system check to ensure that it is held se curely in position If it is not held tight and secure the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in creased 100519 1 Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear most position 2 Make the cleara
96. slipping avoid sudden braking abrupt acceleration high speed driving and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking To supplement the foot brake use the en gine brake effectively to control the vehi cle speed Shift into a lower gear when necessary Avoid shifting down abruptly Such behav ior can cause the wheels to lock possibly leading to loss of vehicle control An anti lock brake system ABS enhanc es your vehicle s braking performance on snowy and icy roads Refer to the ABS Anti lock Brake System and Vehicle Dynamics Control system section in chapter 7 for information on braking on slippery surfaces Driving tips 8 9 V Wiper operation when snowing Before driving in cold weather make sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window use the defroster with the airflow control button in the W position and the temperature control dial set for maxi mum warmth until the wiper blades are completely thawed out If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer it is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blades To thaw out the rear wiper blade use the rear window defogger When driving in snow if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the wind shield despite wiper ope
97. spines from the old blade rubber and in stall them in the new blade rubber d B00066 4 Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber as sembly then slide the blade rubber as sembly into place B00067 Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support ends If the rubber is not retained properly the wiper may scratch the rear window glass 5 Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm Make sure that it locks in place 6 Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position Battery Before beginning work on or near any battery be sure to extinguish all cigarettes matches and light ers Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks Bat teries give off a gas which is high ly flammable and explosive For safety in case an explosion does occur wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery Never lean over a battery Do not let battery fluid contact eyes skin fabrics or paint be cause battery fluid is a corrosive acid If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes immediately flush the area with water thor oughly Seek medical help imme diately if acid has entered the eyes If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed immediately drink a large amount of milk or water and seek medical attention immediate ly To lessen the risk of sparks re move ri
98. sur face on or near the SRS side airbag They could prevent proper deploy ment of the SRS side airbag reduc ing protection available to the front seat s occupant V Operation The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air bag can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position The drivers and front passengers SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags de ploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sensor There fore they may not both deploy in the same accident Also the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys independently of the driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel An impact sensor is located in each of the left and right center pillars and rear wheel houses If a center pillar impact sensor senses an impact force above a predeter mined level in a side collision the control module causes both the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted side to inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact sensor on the same side senses an impact If it is a rear wheel house impact sensor alone that senses a sufficiently strong impact force the control module causes only the SRS curtain air bag on the impacted side to inflate After deployment the SRS side airbag immedi ately starts to deflate The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is s
99. switch to the OFF position Vv Random playback V Non MP3 disc Press the RDM button 5 briefly during disc playback to play all of the tracks on the disc in a random order The display will show RDM and all of the tracks on the disc will be played in a random order To cancel random mode press the button again The RDM indication will go off and the normal playback mode will be re sumed NOTE Random playback will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps e Press the RPT button e Press the SCAN button e Press the A button e Select the radio mode e Press the RSE AUX button e Press the y or a side of the SEEK FLDR button e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position V MP3 disc Press the RDM button 5 during disc playback to play all of the tracks in the folder currently being played in random or der Press the RDM button again to play all of the tracks on the disc in random or der The display will show RDM during the random mode To cancel the random mode press the RDM button during in disc random playback The RDM indication will go off and the normal playback mode will be re sumed NOTE e Each time you briefly press the but ton the mode will change to the next one in the following sequence In folder random __ In d
100. technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently V Unleaded gasoline The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy V California fuel If your vehicle was certified to California Emission Standards as indicated on the underhood tune up label it is designed to optimize engine and emission control sys tem performance with gasoline that meets the clean burning low sulfur California gasoline specifications If you live in any other state than California your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal specifications Gasoline sold outside Cali fornia is permitted to have higher sulfur levels which may affect the performance of your vehicle s catalytic converter and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service The CHECK ENGINE warning light Malfunction indicator lamp may also turn on If this occurs return to your autho rized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by yo
101. that is unavoid able then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly e If at any time you suspect that ex haust fumes are entering the vehi cle have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possi ble If you must drive under these conditions drive only with all win dows fully open e Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle E Drinking and driving Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Alcohol in the blood stream delays your reaction and im pairs your perception judgment and attentiveness If you drive after drinking even if you drink just a lit tle it will increase the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal acci dent injuring or killing yourself your passengers and others In ad dition if you are injured in the acci dent alcohol may increase the se verity of that injury Please don t drink and drive Drunken driving is one of the most fre quent causes of accidents Since alcohol affects all people differently you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive However if you have no choice but to drive stop drin
102. the cooling fan belts and any other moving en gine parts Removing rings watch es and ties is advisable Engine hood B00300 To open the hood 1 If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield return them to their original positions 2 Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel Maintenance and service 1 1 5 Always check that the hood is prop erly locked before you start driving If it is not it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury When closing the hood be careful not to pinch your or other person s 3 Release the secondary hood release hands or anything else in the hood located under the front grille by moving the lever toward the left 4 Lift up the hood To close the hood 1 Lower the hood to a point approximate ly 20 in 50 cm from the closed position and then give the hood a strong push down to make it drop 2 After closing the hood be sure the hood is securely locked B00301 If this does not close the hood release it from a slightly higher position Do not push the hood forcibly to close it It could deform the metal 1 1 6 Maintenance and service Engine compartment overview 1 Air cleaner element page 11 13 2 Power steering fluid reservoir page 11 19 3 Differential gear oil level gauge page 11 16 4 Automatic transmission flu
103. the engine oil do not add any additional oil above the upper lev el when the engine is cold E Changing the oil and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in the Warran ty and Maintenance Booklet The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads when short trips are frequent ly made or when driving in extremely cold whether 1 Warm up the engine by letting the en gine idle for approximately 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine 3 Remove the oil filler cap CONTINUED 1 1 8 Maintenance and service B00305 4 Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug while the engine is still warm The used oil should be drained into an appropriate container and disposed of properly Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil 5 Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a clean cloth and tighten it se curely with a new sealing washer after the oil has completely drained out 6 Open the access cover by removing the five clips and turning the access cover counterclockwise The oil filter will be ex posed 7 Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench 8 Before installing a new oil filter apply a thin co
104. the lower limit approximately 0 6 US qt 0 6 liter 0 5 Imp qt E All Wheel Drive warn ing light AWD Continued driving with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage If the AWD warning light flashes promptly park in a safe place then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason The All Wheel Drive warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after the en gine has started This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of different diameters fitted on its wheels or with the air pressure excessive ly low in any of its tires CONTINUED 3 1 8 Instruments and controls E Vehicle Dynamics Con trol operation indicator lt lt light This light comes on when the ignition switch is ON and goes out approximately 2 seconds later It blinks when the skid suppression func tion is activated It illuminates when only the traction control function is operating The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably faulty under any of the following conditions Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately e The light does not come on when the ig nition switch is turned to the ON position e The light does not go out even after a period of approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON po
105. the maximum load limit Overload ing may cause damage to the ve hicle and create a safety hazard Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof rail and install ing the appropriate carrying attachment When installing the roof crossbar kit fol low the manufacturer s instructions When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and a carrying attach ment never exceed the maximum load limit explained in the following You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR See the Loading your vehicle section in this chapter for in formation on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle The maximum load limit of the cargo crossbars and carrying attach ment must not exceed 150 Ibs 67 5 kg Place the heaviest load at the bottom nearest the roof and evenly distribute the cargo Always properly secure all cargo V Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier ski carrier kayak carrier cargo basket etc on the cross bars follow the manufacturer s instruc tions and make sure that the attachment is securely fixed to the crossbars Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars A set of the crossbars is de signed to carry loads cargo and attach ment of not more than 150 Ibs 67 5 kg Before o
106. the player cannot read has been loaded CHECK DISC will appear on the display and the player will not play anything V To select a song from its beginning V Forward direction Briefly press the a side of the TUNE TRACK button 2 to skip to the beginning of the next track file track Each time the button is pressed the indicated track file track number will increase NOTE In an MP3 folder skipping past the last track file track will take you back to the first track file track in the folder V Backward direction Briefly press the yv side of the TUNE TRACK button 2 to skip to the beginning of the current track file track Each time the button is pressed the indicated track file track number will decrease NOTE In an MP3 folder skipping past the first track file track will take you to the last track file track in the folder V Fast forwarding and fast reversing V Fast forwarding Press the side of the TUNE TRACK button 2 continuously to fast forward the track file Release the button to stop fast forward ing NOTE If you fast forward to the end of the last track file track fast forwarding will stop and the player will start playback beginning with the first track file track V Fast reversing Press the y side of the TUNE TRACK button 2 continuously to fast reverse the track file Release the button to stop fast reversing NOTE If y
107. the rear gate open Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when open ing or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading cargo NOTE Should the rear gate be unable to be unlocked due to a discharged battery a fault in the door locking unlocking system or other causes you can un lock it by manually operating the rear gate lock release lever For the procedure refer to Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be unlocked section in chapter 9 Moonroof e Never let anyone s hands arms head or any objects protrude from the moonroof A person could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is involved in an accident To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment you must do the following Before closing the moonroof make sure that no one s hands arms head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moon roof Before leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moonroof Never try to check the anti entrap ment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof Keys and doors 2 23 e Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold condi
108. these precautions are not observed and non matching tires are used it is quite possible that the Vehicle Dynam ics Control system will be unable to op erate correctly as intended e Always turn off the engine before re placing a tire as failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly E Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor V Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light 700316 The indicator light turns on when the igni tion key is turned to the ON position it turns off approximately two seconds later This indicator light flashes during activa tion of the skid suppression function and is illuminated steadily during activation of the traction control function Starting and operating 7 21 The following two situations could indicate a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system if either should occur have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of that system at the first available opportunity e The indicator light does not turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position e The indicator light does not turn off ap proximately two seconds after the ignition key has been turned to the ON position V Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light Traction Control system OFF indicator light This single light has the function of indicat ing malfunctions in the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the function of indicat
109. this can increase the risk or severity of in jury e Keep the lap belt as low as possi ble on your hips In a collision this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones in stead of across the weaker abdo men Seatbelts provide maximum re straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running If the front seatbacks are not used in the up right position in a collision the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase and both can result in serious internal injury or death Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions If you do so the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will in crease and both can result in se rious internal injury or death 100101 Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back If an ac cident occurs this can increase the risk or severity of injury Metallic parts of the seatbelt can be come very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn an occupant Do not touch such hot parts until they cool V Front seatbelts 1 Adjust the seat position Driver s seat Adjust the seatba
110. to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle When a tire becomes warm the air in side it expands causing the tire pres sure to increase Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure E Glossary of tire terminology e Cold tire pressure The pressure in a tire that has been driven less than 1 mile or has been standing for three hours or more e Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated e Recommended inflation pres sure The cold inflation pressure recom mended by a vehicle manufacturer e Intended outboard sidewall 1 The sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particu lar side that must always face out ward when mounting on a vehicle e Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of floor mats leather seats and cross bars to the extent that these items are available as factory in stalled equipment whether installed or not e Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and air conditioning es Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory
111. unnecessarily close to injured in the event of SRS side air the front or rear door on either bag deployment side The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat and it provides protection 100164 by deploying rapidly faster than the blink of an eye in the event of a side impact However the force of its deployment may cause inju ries if your head is too close to it 100165 100166 100167 e Never allow a child to kneel on the front passenger s seat facing the side window or to wrap his her arms around the front seat seat back In the event of an accident the force of the SRS side airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his her head or arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side air bag Since is also your vehicle equipped with a front passenger s SRS frontal airbag children aged 12 and under should be placed in a rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times Never allow a child to kneel on any passenger s seat facing the side window In the event of an acci dent the force of the SRS curtain airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his her head is close to the SRS cur tain airbag Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 61 100168 e Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbag
112. webbing and all hardware pe riodically for cracks cuts gashes tears damage loose bolts or worn areas Re place the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found e Keep the belts free of polishes oils chemicals and particularly battery acid e Never attempt to make modifica tions or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating prop erly Front seatbelt pretensioners 100121 The drivers and front passenger s seat belts have a seatbelt pretensioner The seatbelt pretensioners for the driver s seat and front passenger s seat operate at the same time as the frontal and side SRS airbags The pretensioner sensor also serves as the frontal and side SRS airbag sensors If the sensor detects a certain predeter mined amount of force during a frontal col lision or a side impact collision the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the re tractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the front seat occupant When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released These occurrences are normal and not harmful This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated the seatbelt retractor remains locked Consequently the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and there fore must be replaced NOTE e Seatbelt pretensioners are not de
113. will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15 second intervals The chime will not sound e At speeds higher than approxi mately 9 mph 15 km h The warning light s for unfastened seatbelt s will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15 second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light s is are flashing e If you unfasten and refasten the driv er s seatbelt three times within six sec onds after turning ON the ignition switch the warning operation that fol lows the 6 second warning after turn ing ON the ignition switch is canceled When the ignition switch is turned ON next time however the complete se quence of warning operations re sumes If there is no passenger on the front pas senger s seat the seatbelt warning device for the front passenger s seat will be deac tivated The front passenger s occupant detection system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passen gers seat Observe the following precau tions Failure to do so may prevent the de vice from functioning correctly or cause the device to fail e Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback e Do not store a heavy load in the seat back pocket e Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his her hands or legs on the front passenger s seatback or allow him her to pull the seatback If the seatbelt warning device for the front passenger s s
114. will enter the all disc ejection mode 2 Remove the disc that has been eject ed The other discs loaded will then be ejected one after another If you do not re move the disc that has been ejected the All disc ejection mode will be canceled NOTE e Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out because vibration might make it fall out e If you press the A button while the player is in all disc ejection mode the mode will be cancelled following ejection of the disc that is currently be ing ejected e If you press the CD button while the player is in all disc ejection mode the player will draw in the discs that have been ejected and play them Audio control buttons These buttons are located on the spokes of the steering wheel They allow the driv er to control audio functions without taking his her hands off the steering wheel SZ MODE button 500209 This button is used to select the desired audio mode Each time it is pressed the mode changes to the next one in the fol lowing sequence AM gt CD FM lt RSE 1 The frequency last received in the selected waveband will be displayed 2 Only when a CD is in the player 3 Only vehicle equipped with RSE Rear Seat Entertainment vv and yv buttons Ly ag d 500210 V With radio mode selected Press the a button or y button The rad
115. with the sealing of the cap Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light turn off immediately It may take several driving trips If the light does not go out take your vehicle to your au thorized SUBARU dealer immediately V If the light is blinking If the light is blinking while driving an en gine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission control system To prevent serious damage to the emis sion control system you should do the fol lowing e Reduce vehicle speed e Avoid hard acceleration e Avoid steep uphill grades e Reduce the amount of cargo if possi ble e Stop towing a trailer as soon as possi ble The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on steadily after several driving trips You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately E Charge warning light E If this light comes on when the engine is running it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine starts stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt If the belt is loose broken or if the belt is in good con dition but the light remains on contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediate ly E Oil pressure warning S77 light Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on This may cause serious engine damage
116. zone setting mode CONTINUED 3 36 Instruments and controls E Outside mirrors Vv Convex mirror Passenger side Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flat mirror Do not use the convex mirror to judge the dis tance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes Use the inside mir ror or glance backwards to deter mine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mir ror V Remote control mirror switch 300519 The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position 1 Turn the knob to the L side to adjust the left hand mirror or to the R side to ad just the right hand mirror 2 Move the knob in the direction you want to move the mirror 3 Return the knob to the neutral position to prevent unintentional operation The mirrors can also be adjusted manual ly V Outside mirror defogger 300522 The outside mirror defogger shares the button with rear window defogger The outside mirror defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON po sition To turn on the outside mirror defogger push the button To turn it off push the button again The indicator light located on the button lights up while the outside mirror defogger is op erating The defogger will automatically shut off af ter approximately 15 minutes If the mi
117. 1 psi 6 9 kPa 0 07 kgf cm2 for ev CONTINUED 1 1 24 Maintenance and service ery difference of 10 F 5 6 C between the temperature in the garage and the tem perature outside By way of example the following table shows the required tire pressures that correspond to various out side temperatures when the temperature in the garage is 60 F 15 6 C Standard tire pressures Front 33 psi 230 kPa 2 3 kgf cm Rear 32 psi 220 kPa 2 2 kgf cm Garage temperature 60 F 15 6 C Outside Adjusted pressure temperature psi kPa kgf cm2 front rear 30 F 1 C 36 250 2 5 35 240 2 4 10 F 12 C 38 37 265 2 65 255 2 55 10 F 40 280 2 8 39 270 2 7 23 C If the low tire pressure warning light comes on when you drive the vehicle in cold outside air after adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage re adjust the tire pressures using the method described above Then increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph 32 km h and check to see that the low tire pressure warning light goes off a few minutes later If the low tire pressure warning light does not go off the tire pressure monitoring system may not be functioning normally In this event go to a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected as soon as possible While the vehicle is driven friction be tween tires and the road surface causes the tires to warm up After illumination of the low tire pr
118. 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down Repeat this proce dure 5 Check the parking brake stroke If the parking brake stroke is out of the specified range adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located on the parking brake pedal Parking brake stroke 5 6 notches 67 Ibs 300 N 30 kg Parking brake stroke Tires and wheels A B00325 Check the parking brake stroke according to the maintenance schedule in the War ranty and Maintenance Booklet When the parking brake is properly adjusted braking power is fully applied by pressing the pedal five to six notches gently but firmly approximately 67 Ibs 300 N 30 kg If the parking brake pedal stroke is not within the specified range have the brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer E Types of tires You should be familiar with type of tires present on your vehicle V All season tires The factory installed tires on your new ve hicle are all season tires All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction handling and braking performance in year round driving including snowy and icy road con ditions However all season tires do not of fer as much traction performance as win ter Snow tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M S Mud amp Snow on the tire sidewall YV Summer tires Summer tires are high speed capabilit
119. 41 1 Normal operating range The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the ON position The coolant temperature will vary in ac cordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the middle of the range En gine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range safely stop the ve hicle as soon as possible See the In case of emergency in chapter 9 Warning and indicator lights Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the ON position This permits check ing the operation of the bulbs Apply the parking brake and turn the igni tion switch to the ON position The fol lowing lights come on ER Drivers seatbelt warning light The seatbelt warning light goes out only when the driver fastens the seatbelt PASS fA Front passenger s seatbelt warn ing light The seatbelt warning light goes out only when the front seat passenger fastens the seatbelt AIR BAG SRS airbag system warning light CHECK ENGINE CHECK ENGINE warning light Malfunction indicator lamp E Charge warni
120. 7 14 HOW NSS ed 8 10 Sounding a panic alarm EEN 2 10 Spare tile irei ee ege a E 9 2 Sparkplugs ee eer E A E 11 14 Specifications ee EE 12 2 Speedometer eege 3 6 SRS Curtain airbag KEE 1 59 Frontala bag casteran aeaea pa Eeen pea a 1 51 Side airbag E 1 59 SRS airbag Supplemental Restraint System airbag 4 1 44 SRS airbag system warning light eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 11 Stating the nell EE 7 7 State emission testing U S only oe eeeeeeeettteees 7 5 Steering wheel Se EE 7 15 KI 3 37 Stopping the engine 7 8 Storage compartment AANEREN 6 4 BUMS NAdSS EE 2 25 ele RE 6 3 Supplemental Restraint System airbag SRS 1 44 Synthetic leather upholstery ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 5 T Tachometer EE 3 7 Temperature gauge svewcissic ie cabiietadavaclveuiseeiswesemaneeigabexauta 3 8 Temporary Spare tire csseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 9 6 Third row seat EE 1 11 Tie down ee 9 15 Index 14 7 Tilt steering wee ssSESKRRRNNEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEREEEEEENEEE E 3 37 Tire Kee Ee 8 11 enee EE 11 25 Pressures ANd wear EEN 11 25 Replacement EE 11 28 FROLAUO MM EE 11 28 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS saasssnsnnnnnannnn 7 24 RI 12 3 KE 11 23 RI ne Re ENEE 11 23 Top tether anchorages cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 1 41 AKALA e BE 9 15 All wheels on the ground AAR 9 18 Flatbed t k EE 9 17 Re Nee 9 15 Ce LEE 8 18 Traction Cont
121. C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci fied government test surfaces of as phalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include accelera tion cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics E Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tempera ture can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corre sponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of per formance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not over loaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading either separately or in combina tion can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13 13 Reportin
122. E E 2 25 Locking the doors ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 2 9 Unlocking the doors ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 9 Unlocking the rear gate sssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 9 Illuminated entry EE 2 9 Vehicle finder function REENEN KEREN 2 10 Sounding a panic alarm EEN 2 10 Selecting audible signal operation cee 2 10 Replacing the battery ccccccceeeeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 10 Replacing lost transmitters cccccsssseseeeeeeeeeee 2 11 Alarm System EE 2 14 System alarm operation EN 2 14 Activating and deactivating the alarm system 2 15 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm Syste Mean a e a a aE aA a E 2 15 Arming the system EEEEEEEEEEE EEN nnne 2 15 Disarming the system seeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 16 2 2 Keys and doors Keys a 200700 1 Master key 2 Submaster key 3 Valet key 4 Key number plate 5 Security ID plate Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle Master key submaster key and valet key The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle e Ignition switch e Driver s door e Glove box The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key If it bangs against your knees while you are drivin
123. EEK FLDR button e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position Y SCAN The scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds of each track file track in succession Press the SCAN button 7 to start scanning upward beginning with the track file track following the currently selected one When all tracks files tracks in the disc folder have been scanned nor mal playback will be resumed To cancel the scan mode press the button again NOTE The scan mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps e Press the RPT button e Press the RDM button e Press the y or a side of the TUNE TRACK button e Press the yv or a side of the SEEK FLDR button MP3 disc e Press the A button e Press the disc select button e Select the radio mode e Press the RSE AUX button e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position V Display selection MP3 disc If you press the AUDIO button 3 for 0 5 second or longer during playback the in dication will change to the next one in the following sequence File titte gt Time Folder title _ V Page track folder title scroll MP3 disc If having pressed the AUDIO button 3 to select track title or folder title display you press the AUDIO button again for l
124. Foreword Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle This Owner s Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation For information not found in this Owner s Manual such as details concerning repairs or adjustments please contact the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer The information specifications and illustrations found in this man ual are those in effect at the time of printing FUJI HEAVY INDUS TRIES LTD reserves the right to change specifications and de signs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any ob ligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previous ly sold This Owner s Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment including factory installed options Some explanations therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale The next owner will need the information found herein FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD TOKYO JAPAN SUBARU is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD copyright 2005 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD 000083 000084 Warranties E Warranties for U S A All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
125. LR function by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully For instructions on how to convert the re tractor to the ALR mode and restore it to the ELR mode see the Child restraint systems section in this chapter E Seatbelt warning light Ei and chime Se Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver s and front passenger s seat With the ignition switch turned to the ON position this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the following il lustrations and sounding a chime D 100372 Driver s warning light 100373 Front passenger s warning light V Operation If the driver and or front passenger have has not yet fastened the seatbelt s when the ignition switch is turned to the ON po sition the seatbelt warning light s will flash for 6 seconds to warn that the seat belt s is are unfastened If the driver s seatbelt is not fastened a chime will also sound simultaneously If the drivers and or front passenger s seatbelt s are is still not fastened 6 sec onds later both warning lights or the warning light for the unfastened seatbelt will remain lit for 15 seconds If the driver s and or front passenger s seatbelt s are is still not fastened even 15 seconds later 21 seconds after turning ON the ignition Seat seatbelt and SR
126. MOONOOT EE 2 23 Multi function display xin cachictiaisncrtinigasttadiisaehinaie 3 23 N New vehicle break in driving the first 1 000 miles 1 G00 Kil ene 8 2 O VLOG LET kiei i e a e a Ea E EAEE SEE 3 6 Oil filter tee r O 11 7 Oil level ENGINE E 11 7 Front differential gear seseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 16 R ar differential E 11 17 Oil pressure warning light c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 On pavement and off road driving cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 5 EIERE eieiei 3 36 Outside temperature indication cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 21 Overheating engine eEeEEEERRERREERERREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEENEn 9 14 P Parking ege 11 23 ele WE 3 28 Periodic Dee 8 4 14 6 Index Power Door locking switches ccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeess 2 6 WOE fen ala dod aura ee ieee eas aud acon cde 1 3 DLS STING TCH WEEN 11 19 MANILOW Soc oct eet E 2 19 Precautions against vehicle modification 1 29 1 68 Preparing to drive ei SE nnne 7 6 Printed antenna assesses cecngas lass SacnccuiebahapodnrWiaaieesdagatansigresiedes 5 2 R Rear Air CONCINONEL egenen eege Eed 4 9 Combination le LEE 11 42 EE IR ge EEN 11 17 EE 2 22 Seals re tee Eeer 1 6 Rear seat Second seat EEN 1 6 Rear window Defogger DEI EE 3 33 Wiper and washer switch seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 32 Recommended Automatic transmission fluid
127. N Ze indicator light SR Passenger airbag OFF 3 12 Se indicator light SPORT mode indica SPORT tor light SC Zi Windshield washer flu 3 17 i id warning light R DIFF Rear differential oil TEMP temperature warning 3 14 light CONTINUED 20 E Cargo area 1 Jack handle page 9 19 2 Maintenance tools page 9 19 3 Jack page 9 19 4 Spare tire page 9 2 Vv 7 seater models 000089 EN Vv 5 seater models 1 Jack handle page 9 19 2 Jack page 9 19 3 Maintenance tools page 9 19 4 Spare tire page 9 2 000148 CONTINUED 22 Function settings A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details If your vehicle is equipped with navigation system the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the monitor For details please refer to the Owner s Manual supplement for the monitor Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page Alarm system Alarm system Operation Non operation Operation 2 14 Monitoring start delay time after closure of 0 second 30 seconds 30 seconds 2 16 doors Impact sensor operation only vehicles Operation Non operation Non operation 2 18 with shock sensors dealer option Passive arming Operation Non operation Non operation 2 17 Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Ope
128. OT release the button until step 4 has been complet ed 2 When the HomeLink indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter of the device for which you wish to program the button at 1 to 3 inches 25 to 76 mm away Interior equipment 6 17 from the HomeLink button surface 3 Press and hold the hand held transmit ter button The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly 4 When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The programming for the previous device is now erased and the new device can be operated by pushing the HomeLink but ton E Erasing HomeLink button memory NOTE e Performing this procedure erases the memory of all the preprogrammed buttons simultaneously The memory of individual buttons cannot be erased e It is recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the memory of all pro grammed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash af ter 20 seconds 2 Release both buttons E In case a problem occurs If you cannot activate a device using the CONTINUED 6 18 interior equipment corresponding HomeLink button after programming contact HomeLink at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 for assistance ME 7 2 Fuel requirements cccccccccceeesseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
129. OWS EE a 2 19 Windshield Washer fluid NEEN 11 30 Wiper and washer switches ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 30 ele Ee 3 32 Winter driving BE 8 7 Wiper and washer eege 3 29 LY U S Compass Calibration Zones LY ft fon tool d r Ch A7 LE V ace 12 ER DA kington DC j h rleston Ai 11 e Winsto Salem 000134 GAS STATION REFERENCE Fuel Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher For temporary purposes if premium unleaded gasoline is not available you may use regular unleaded gasoline with an oc tane rating of 87 AKI or higher For optimum engine performance and driveability it is recommended that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline E Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Mo tor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index AKI Refer to Fuel section in this manual Cold tire pressure Fuel capacity 16 9 US gal 64 liters 14 1 Imp gal Engine oil Use only API classification SM with the words ENERGY CON SERVING and the ILSAC certification mark starburst mark dis played on the container Engine oil capacity 5 8 US qt 5 5 liters 4 8 Imp qt Tire size P255 55R18 104H Wheel size 18 x 8JJ Pressure Front 33 psi 230 kPa 2 3 kgf cm2 32 psi 220 kPa 2 2 kgf cm Rear Rear at trailer towing Temporary spare t
130. S airbags 1 17 switch the warning lights will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15 second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light s is are flashing Alternate flashing and steady illumination of the warning lights and sounding of the chime will continue until both driver and front passenger fasten their seatbelts NOTE e If the driver and or front passenger unfasten s the seatbelt s after fasten ing the seatbelt warning device oper ates as follows according to the vehi cle speed e At speeds lower than approximate ly 9 mph 15 km h The warning light s for unfastened seatbelt s will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15 second intervals The chime will not sound e At speeds higher than approxi mately 9 mph 15 km h The warning light s for unfastened seatbelt s will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15 second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light s is are flashing e It is possible to cancel the warning operation that follows the 6 second CONTINUED 1 1 8 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags warning after turning ON the ignition switch by unfastening and refastening the driver s seatbelt When the ignition switch is turned ON next time howev er the complete sequence of the warn ing operation resumes For further de tails about canceling the warning oper ation please contact your SUBARU dealer I
131. S frontal airbag deploys This is normal Observe the following precautions Failure to do so may prevent the Subaru ad vanced frontal airbag system from func tioning correctly or cause the system to fail CONTINUED 1 52 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags e Do not apply any strong impact to the front passenger s seat such as by kicking e Do not spill liquid on the front passen ger s seat If liquid is spilled wipe it off im mediately e Do not disassemble the front passen ger s seat e Do not install any accessory such as an audio amplifier other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front pas senger s seat e Do not place anything shoes umbrella etc under the front passenger s seat e The front passenger s seat must not be used with the head restraint removed e Do not leave any article including a child restraint system on the front passenger s seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle en gaged when you leave your vehicle e Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor If the seatbelt buckle switch and or front passenger s occupant detection system have failed the SRS airbag system warn ing light will illuminate Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme diately if the SRS airbag system warning light comes on If your vehicle has sustained impact this may affect the proper function of the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system Have your veh
132. SRS airbags 100681 1 Bar e Folding the seatback of the center seat will expose the bar that re tains it in the raised position Be careful not to hurt yourself on it Especially do not rest your finger on the bar Otherwise when the seatback is raised your finger could be pinched between the bar and seatback and thus injured Raise the seatback of the center seat while taking care not to trap your hands or other parts of the body between the center seat and window side seat NOTE 1 Holder With the seatback folded attach the tongue plate of each rear second row seatbelt to the corresponding holder Do the same also before someone gets into the third row seat E Head restraint adjustment Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear Vv Window side seats The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position Be fore sitting on the seat raise the head restraint to an appropriate po sition depending on your sitting height To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower it push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is clos est to the top of the occupant s ears When the seats are not occupie
133. T TEMP s d s ill A 300553 Canada spec vehicles When the outside temperature drops to 37 F 3 C or lower the temperature indi cation flashes to show that the road sur face may be frozen If the outside temperature drops to 37 F 3 C or lower while the display is giving an indication other than the outside tem perature the display switches to the out side temperature indication and flashes for five seconds before returning to its original indication If the display is already indicating an out side temperature of 37 F 3 C or lower when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indication does not flash NOTE The outside temperature indication may differ from the actual outside tem perature The road surface freeze warn ing indication should be treated only as a guide Be sure to check the condi tion of the road surface before driving Multi function display Vehi cle without Navigation Sys tem NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to the sepa rate Operating Instructions for Moni tor System e A liquid crystal display is used in the multi function display You will find its indications hard to see if you wear po larized glasses With the ignition switch in the ON posi tion each successive push of the INFO button toggles the display in the following sequence Current Average fuel con gt
134. Towing hook page 9 15 000085 11 1 Rear gate page 2 22 2 Rear wiper blade assembly and rub ber replacement page 3 32 3 Rear window defogger button page 3 33 4 Fuel filler lid and cap page 7 3 5 Child safety locks page 2 19 6 Tie down hooks page 9 15 7 Bulb replacement page 11 39 8 Towing hook page 9 15 000105 CONTINUED 12 E Interior 1 Seatbelt page 1 15 2 Lower anchorages for child restraint Vv Passenger compartment area system page 1 38 3 Center console page 6 5 4 Front seat page 1 2 5 Second row seat page 1 6 6 Third row seat page 1 11 13 1 Cargo area light page 6 2 2 Dome lights page 6 2 3 Rear center seatbelt page 1 22 4 Sun visors page 6 3 5 Map light page 6 3 6 Top tether anchorages Rear seat Second row seat page 1 41 7 Top tether anchorages Third row seat page 1 41 6 THA N v A d 7 000087 CONTINUED 14 1 Select lever page 7 9 2 Hazard warning flasher switch page 3 5 3 Multi function display page 3 23 4 Glove box page 6 4 5 Audio page 5 1 6 Climate control page 4 1 7 Cup holder page 6 7 page 6 8 000088 E instrument panel 15 1 Door locks page 2 4 2 Illumination brightness control page 3 27 3 Remote control mirror page 3 36 4 Windshield wiper deicer page 3 32 5 Traction Con
135. UED 6 10 interior equipment gap between the center console lower Coat hook compartment and the lid It is also A WARNING possible to pass the cord through a W Rear 5 seater models Sec Do not hang coat hangers or other groove in the lid and up to the center ond row 7 seater models hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deploy ment of the SRS curtain airbags SE they could cause serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks and being console upper compartment passenger area thrown through the cabin or by pre venting correct airbag deployment Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks make sure there are no pointed objects in the pockets Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers 600516 AXCAUTION Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the driv er s view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 11 Ibs 5 kg or more Q Ir 400249 A coat hook is attached to each of the pas senger hand grips for the seat listed in the following e 5 seater models Rear seat e 7 seater models Second seat Shopping bag hook Interior equipment 6 11 Floor mat Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 11 Ibs 5 kg or more J N E A shopping bag hook is at
136. abin is stored in the roof side be tween the front pillar and a point over the rear seat An SRS AIRBAG mark is lo cated at the top of each center pillar In a moderate to severe side impact colli sion the SRS curtain airbag on the im pacted side of the vehicle deploys be tween the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant s head In a 7 seater model vehicle the SRS cur tain airbag does not operate for third row seat occupants CONTINUED 1 60 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags The SRS side airbag and SRS cur e Do not sit or lean unnecessarily tain airbag are designed as only a close to either front door The supplement to the primary protec SRS side airbag is stored in both tion provided by the seatbelt They front seat seatbacks next to the do not do away with the need to fas door and it provides protection ten seatbelts It is also important to by deploying rapidly faster than wear your seatbelt to help avoid in the blink of an eye in the event of juries that can result when an occu a side impact collision However pant is not seated in a proper up the force of SRS side airbag de right position ployment may cause injuries if your head or other parts of the GER too close to the SRS side AA WARNING Since your vehicle is equipped Do not rest your arm on either front with SRS curtain airbags do not door or its internal trim It could be sit or lean
137. accessory parts to your vehicle Do not perform any of the following modifications Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pertensioners e Attachment of any equipment bush bar winches snow plow skid plate etc other than genu ine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end e Modification of the suspension system or front end structure CONTINUED 1 30 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags e Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle plac ard attached to the door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner s Manual Child restraint systems 100500 While riding in the vehicle infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in one of the rear seating positions recommended in this owner s manual You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan dards is compatible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the child s age and size All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt except those covered under the section in this manual entitled Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and teth er anchorages LATCH Children could be endange
138. ace with four pins 400562 2 Unhook the strap Climate control 4 1 1 400595 3 Remove the glove box by detaching the one clip on the side 400596 4 Remove the air filter cover by detach ing the five clips CONTINUED 4 1 2 Climate control 6 Replace the air filter with a new one 7 Install the air filter cover 8 Install the glove box 400562 400595 10 Secure the glove box with the one clip 11 Install the instrument panel side cover 400566 12 Label installation Attach the caution label to the drivers door Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following occurs even if it is not yet time to change the filter Reduction of the air flow through the vents Windshield gets easily fogged or misted NOTE The filter can influence the air condi tioning heating and defroster perfor mance if not properly maintained Antenna system EE Printed antenna E a RE d E Installation Of accessories ENEE Cl Ve RT EE Type A audio Set cccecseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeeenensees Type B audio set cssecsccceciscscas esses idataete ce estes Type A audio set if equipped EEN Radio operation Zeeche deeg Compact disc player operation EE Type B audio set if equipped RER Radio operation eiert eier e
139. acing up 3 Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable up completely until you hear a few clicking sounds Confirm that the temporary spare tire holding cable has been wound up completely by shaking the temporary tire If the temporary spare tire is not stored securely it could damage ad jacent areas of the vehicle and make an abnormal noise 4 Put the rubber cap on the hoist shaft end hole 5 Fit the access cover 6 Place the wheel nut wrench and exten sion back into the tool bag and store the jack and tool bag in their storage loca tions 7 Fit the lid of the cargo area e When stowing a flat tire in the spare tire holder turn the hoist shaft end only slowly If it is turned quickly the wheel disc of the flat tire could be damaged In case of emergency 9 5 A full size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only After having the flat tire repaired immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire Remember that the tread width of a flat tire is wider than that of the temporary spare tire When carry ing a flat tire stowed in the spare tire holder make sure the tire does not touch any obstacles 9 6 In case of emergency Temporary spare tire e Never tow a trailer when the tem porary spare tire is used The tem porary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load Use of the temporary spare tire when
140. air bag ON indicator will remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will illuminate If both the ON and OFF indicators remain lit or extinguished simultaneously the sys tem is faulty Contact your SUBARU deal er immediately for an inspection E CHECK ENGINE warn ing light Malfunction in dicator lamp If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving have your vehicle checked repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possi ble Continued vehicle operation CHECK ENGINE without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause serious damage which may not be covered by your vehicle s warranty If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate that there is a problem or potential prob lem somewhere in the emission control system V If the light comes on steadily If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the engine starts an emission control system malfunction has been detected You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi ately NOTE This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks If you have recently refueled your vehicle the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light malfunction indicator lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks Make sure nothing is interfering
141. aired the seatbelt pretensioners and or SRS airbags will operate improperly e g SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi nor collision or not inflate in a se vere collision which may increase the risk of injury e Flashing or flickering of the warn ing light e No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position e Continuous illumination of the warning light e Illumination of the warning light while driving Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 67 E SRS airbag system servicing e When discarding an airbag mod ule or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision consult your SUBARU dealer The SRS airbag has no user ser viceable parts Do not use electri cal test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system For required servicing of the SRS airbag see your nearest SUBARU dealer Tampering with or discon necting the system s wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the sys tem inoperative which may result in serious injury The wiring har nesses of the SRS airbag system are covered with yellow insulation and system connectors are yellow for easy identification CONTINUED 1 68 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags If you need service or repair in areas listed in the following have an au thorized SUBARU dealer perform the work The SRS airbag control module impact sensors and airbag
142. al spines remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and in stall them in the new blade rubber Be sure to install each metal spine so as to fit its groove completely on the center ridge of the blade rubber Doing otherwise may result in dislo cation and breakage of the spine during wiper operation B00398 3 Align the claws of the metal support with the grooves in the rubber and slide the blade rubber assembly into the metal support until it locks B00399 1 Stopper 4 Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown If the rubber is not retained properly the wiper blade may scratch the windshield E Rear window wiper blade as sembly 1 Raise the wiper arm off the rear win dow I I I I I I I I I I I I a M sstraue 700063 2 Turn the wiper blade assembly coun terclockwise Maintenance and service 1 1 33 700064 3 Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm E Rear window wiper blade rub ber 700017 CONTINUED 1 1 34 Maintenance and service 1 Pull out the end of the blade rubber as sembly to unlock it from the plastic sup port B00064 2 Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic support B00333 1 Metal spines 3 If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines remove the metal
143. amics Control system is probably faulty under the following condi tion Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible e The light does not go out even after the lapse of several minutes the engine has warmed up after the engine has started E Security indicator light G 200702 The indicators are located in the center portion of the dashboard This indicator light shows the status of the alarm system It also indicates operation of the immobilizer system V Alarm system It blinks to show the driver the operational status of the alarm system For detailed information refer to the Alarm system section in chapter 2 Vv Immobilizer system This light blinks approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from ON position to the ACC or LOCK po sition or immediately after the key is pulled out Refer to the Door locks section in Instruments and controls 3 1 9 chapter 2 If the indicator light does not flash it may indicate that immobilizer system may be faulty Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately In the event that an unauthorized key for example an unauthorized duplicate is used the security indicator light comes on E SPORT mode indicator SPORT light This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after the engine has started When the selector lever is m
144. approxi mately three seconds This light comes on when the CRUISE main switch is pressed NOTE If you move the cruise control lever or press the main switch button while turning the ignition switch ON the cruise control function is deactivated and the CRUISE indicator light flash es To reactivate the cruise control function turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK position and then turn it again to the ON position CRUISE E Cruise control set indica SET tor light The cruise control set indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approximately three seconds This light comes on when vehicle speed has been set E Headlight indicator SOS light This indicator light comes on when the light switch is turned to the og posi tion to turn on the parking lights or to the SCH position to turn on the headlights E Front fog light indicator N light This indicator light is on while the front fog lights are on Clock NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a navi gation system refer to the separate Operating Instructions for Monitor System CLOCK er IL 300603 The clock shows the time while the igni tion switch is in the ACC or ON posi tion To adjust the time shown by the clock press the button or the button
145. ark your vehicle in an emergency 300504 The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions Avoid stopping on the road It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs The hazard warning flasher can be acti vated regardless of the ignition switch po sition Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch Turn it off by pushing the switch again NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on the turn signals do not work Spare tire 900201 The spare tire is stored in the spare tire holder located under the cargo area The spare tire holder has a hoist mecha nism that can lower and raise the spare tire easily The spare tire holder is designed to carry only the following kinds of tires e the temporary spare tire that came with your vehicle e a full size flat tire A full size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only Af ter having the full size flat tire repaired immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire Before using the temporary spare tire see the Temporary spare tire section in this chapter for instructions and precautions E Removing the spare tire 1 Take the wheel nut wrench and exten sion out of the tool bag Refer to the Main tenance tools section in this chapter 900202 2 Remo
146. ascending order of position number If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the LOAD but ton the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have insert ed e The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is already inserted in the correspond ing position of the magazine e While the player is in the loading mode if you press FM or AM button the play er will enter the standby mode Press the CD button to start playback V Inserting a disc in a desired position 1 Briefly press the LOAD button 10 If the magazine in the player has an idle po sition where you can insert a disc the disc number indicator associated with the idle position will blink The positions in the magazine the indica tor of which steadily lights up are already loaded with discs 2 Press the disc select button 9 at the position where you want to insert a disc 3 Insert the disc when LOAD flashes on the display The disc will then be automat ically drawn in and the player will begin to play the first track on the disc e If you wish to insert another disc repeat the procedure beginning with step 1 If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the LOAD but ton the player will begin to play back the first track of the last disc you have insert ed e While the player is in the loading mode if you press FM or AM
147. ast 6 times within 10 seconds after Step 2 4 While still holding down the UNLOCK side of the power door locking switch open and close the drivers door once within 10 seconds after Step 3 5 The turn signal lights flashes 3 times to indicate completion of the setting You may have the above settings done by your SUBARU dealer E Replacing the battery Do not let dust oil or water get on or in the transmitter when replacing the battery When the transmitter battery begins to get weak transmitter range will begin to de crease Replace the battery as soon as possible To replace the battery 200715 1 Open the transmitter case using a flat head screwdriver 200716 2 Remove the old battery from the hold er 200717 1 Negative side facing up 3 Replace with a new battery Type CR2025 or equivalent making sure to in stall the new battery with the negative side facing up 4 Refit the removed half of the transmit ter case After the battery is replaced the trans mitter must be synchronized with the keyless entry system s control unit Press either the H or o button six times to synchronize the unit E Replacing lost transmitters If you lose a transmitter or want to pur chase additional transmitters up to four Keys and doors 2 11 can be programmed you should re pro gram all of your transmitters for security reaso
148. at of engine oil to the seal 9 Clean the rubber seal seating area of the bottom of engine and install the oil fil ter by hand turning Be careful not to twist or damage the seal 10 Tighten the oil filter by the amount indi cated in the following table after the seal makes contact with the bottom of engine Amount of rotation Oil filter color Part number Black 15208AA031 3 4 rotation e Never over tighten the oil filter be cause that can result in an oil leak e Thoroughly wipe off any engine oil that has spilled over the ex haust pipe and or under cover If left unremoved the oil could catch fire 11 Reinstall the cover under the oil filter 12 Pour engine oil through the filler neck Oil capacity Guideline 5 8 US qt 5 5 liters 4 8 Imp qt The oil quantity indicated above is only a guideline The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that has been drained The quantity of drained oil differs slightly depending on the tempera ture of the oil and the time the oil is left flowing out After refilling the engine with oil therefore you must use the dipstick to confirm that the level is correct 13 Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks appear around the filter s rubber seal and drain plug 14 Run the engine until it reaches the nor mal operating temperature Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain back Check the oil level again an
149. ated entry EE 2 9 Illumination brightness control eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 Immobilizer system EE 2 3 elteren 3 19 Indicator light Cruise control Aender eddiad nataatent 3 20 E e E GE 3 20 PEON SOG voces eather hea Sake th asl sede hale chs ach sieet ANE 3 20 Headlight E 3 20 High vn OR 3 20 Select lever Gear position cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 20 TRIE SIQIAL EEN 3 20 SIGS un ONT 3 34 Interior e Tu EE 6 2 J Jack and jack handle vacacisicdscaccecectaieng sagt vdisalatenaensvteavecs 9 19 Jump SEAMING EE 9 11 K Key Keyless entry system E 2 8 N mbers eene eelerer 2 2 Reminder chime Ae 3 4 KEYS deet EE 2 2 L Leather seat materials cccccccccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 4 Light E Tee e EE 6 2 Control SWIG IA EE 3 26 ln CEET 6 2 WAR EE 6 3 Light control switch vin catdssirutcutsasarinncateterina atadacsweieitncxanins 3 26 Loading your vehicle sxic045Siisskavessavawsirrndseintocticerekdonnetens 8 11 Low fuel warning jobt 3 8 3 17 Low tire pressure warning light sseecseeeeseeeeseeeee 3 14 Lumbar support snachesccatscepeinwekaawintenticg oinden pocierhe SriessulenssiTeleatynd 1 5 M Main EE 11 37 Maintenance PP eI IS 55 ege ee ee 11 3 CS CG ege 11 3 Seatbelt Ate eech leren 1 26 TOOS ree iota tics Se ascended te ES a Ee 9 19 Index 14 5 Manual mode 7 11 Map Me Lu SE 6 3 11 45 Maximum load limits 8 18 Meters and Ee EE 3 5 lge EC 3 34
150. ausing damage to the trim V Third row seatbelt 7 seater models 1 Sit well back in the seat 2 Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly Do not let it get twisted If Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 25 the belt stops before reaching the buckle return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly If the belt still cannot be unlocked let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it then pull it out slowly again 2 100102 3 Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click CONTINUED 1 26 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags NN 4 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt 5 Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips not on your waist 100103 V Unfastening the seatbelt 100105 Push the button on the buckle NOTE 100647 1 Holder e Before folding or raising the seat back of the third row seat confirm that the seatbelt is flat against the sidewall at the lower point and the webbing is attached to the holder e When raising the seatback of the third row seat if the seatbelt catches on the seatback hold the belt forward of the seatback while latching the seat back E Seatbelt maintenance To clean the seatbelts use a mild soap and lukewarm water Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously af fect their strength Inspect the seatbelts and attachments in cluding the
151. back on the booster seat Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 37 3 Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer 4 Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click Take care not to twist the seatbelt Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child s shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the child s hips 100514 5 To remove the booster seat press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract CONTINUED 1 38 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags e Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed In an accident this can increase the risk or severity of in jury to the child Never place the shoulder belt un der the child s arm or behind the child s back If an accident oc curs this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint Loose fitting belts are not as ef fective in preventing or reducing injury Place the lap belt as low as possi ble on the child s hips A high po sitioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen and both can result in serious internal injury or death Make sure the shoulder belt is po sitioned across the center of child s shoulder
152. be dangerous and lead to loss of ve hicle control You must install four winter tires that are of the same size circum ferences construction brand and load range Mixing other siz es circumferences or construc tions may result in severe me chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride handling braking and speed ometer odometer calibration It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control Do not use a combination of radi al belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an ac cident Your vehicle is equipped with all season tires which are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction handling and braking performance in year round driving In winter it may be possible to en hance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle be sure to use the correct tire size and type You must install four winter tires that are of the same size construction brand and load range and you should nev er mix radial belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics When you choose a tire make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your ve hicle Your vehicle comes with P255 55R18
153. be inspected and lubricated periodically Cleaning the interior Use a soft damp cloth to clean the climate control panel audio equipment instru ment panel center console combination meter panel and switches Do not use or ganic solvents E Seat fabric Remove loose dirt dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner use a soft blush then vacuum it Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thor oughly If the fabric is still dirty wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm wa ter then dry thoroughly If the stain does not come out try a com mercially available fabric cleaner Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not affect the fabric adversely Use the cleaner according to its instructions NOTE When cleaning the seat do not use benzine paint thinner or any similar materials E Leather seat materials The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with proper care Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the material to become brittle and to wear prematurely Regular cleaning with a soft moist natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woo
154. becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident the driv er and all passengers in the vehi cle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving The SRS Supplemental Restraint Sys tem airbag does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts In combination with the seatbelts it offers the best combined protec tion in case of a serious accident Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the ve hicle has the SRS airbag e The SRS airbags deploy with con siderable speed and force Occu pants who are out of proper posi tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi cal while still maintaining full ve hicle control and the front passen ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat Carefully read the sections Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags in chapter 1 of this own ers manual for instructions and precau tions concerning the seatbelt system and SRS airbag system E Child safety Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision because the child will be
155. bove the hood release knob and pull it toward you to remove it B00198 The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in the engine compart ment B00336 The other one is housed in the engine compartment B00337 The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse box in the engine compartment B00338 1 Good 2 Blown If any lights accessories or other electri cal controls do not operate inspect the corresponding fuse If a fuse has blown replace it 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and turn off all electrical accesso ries 2 Remove the cover 3 Determine which fuse may be blown The back side of each fuse box cover and the Fuses and circuits section in chapter 12 in this manual show the circuit for each fuse 3 ef KP 600160 4 Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller 5 Inspect the fuse If it has blown re place it with a spare fuse of the same rat ing 6 If the same fuse blows again this indi cates that its system has a problem Con tact your SUBARU dealer for repairs Maintenance and service 1 1 37 Main fuse B00336 Main fuse box The main fuses are designed to melt dur ing an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment Check the main fuses if any electrical component fails to operate except the starter motor and other fuses are good A melted main fuse mu
156. c appliances must be 120W or less e Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlet Do not place any foreign objects especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil into the accessory power outlet That could cause a short circuit Al ways put the cap on the accesso ry power outlet when it is not in use Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC and which consume less than 120W Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit Do not use double adapt ers or more than one electrical ap pliance If the plug on your electric appli ance is either too loose or too tight for the accessory power out let this can result in a poor con tact or cause the plug to get stuck Only use plugs that fit properly Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery dis charge Before driving your vehicle make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals If they do do not use the electrical appliance while driving Interior equipment 6 9 600425 NOTE It is possible when using the outlet in the center console lower compart ment with the lid closed to pass the electrical appliance s cord through a CONTIN
157. can celled if you perform any of the follow ing steps Press the RDM button Press the SCAN button Press the A button Select the radio mode Press the RSE AUX button Press the yv or a side of the SEEK FLDR button MP3 disc e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position V To repeat the currently playing fold er MP3 disc To repeat the currently playing folder press the RPT 6 button twice while a file track is playing The display will show D RPT and the folder will be played re peatedly To cancel the folder repeat play mode press the RPT button once more The D RPT indication will go off and the nor mal playback mode will be resumed NOTE e Each time you briefly press the but ton the mode will change to the next one in the following sequence RPT gt D RPT gt CANCEL If you accidentally press the button and cancel the folder repeat play mode press it again to reselect the folder repeat play mode e The folder repeat play mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the fol lowing steps e Press the RDM button e Press the SCAN button e Press the A button e Select the radio mode e Press the RSE AUX button e Press the y or a side of the SEEK FLDR button MP3 disc e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition
158. can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance If the vehicle requires frequent re filling there may be a leak If you suspect a problem have the vehi cle checked at your SUBARU dealer e Never use different brands of brake fluid together Also avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake flu ids even if they are of the same brand e When adding brake fluid be care ful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts Alcohol contained in the brake flu id may damage them Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe it may cause a bad smell smoke and or a fire If brake fluid gets on the ex haust pipe be sure to wipe it off Check the fluid level monthly B00322 Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir If the level is below MIN add the recommended brake fluid to MAX Use only brake fluid from a sealed con tainer E Recommended brake fluid FMVSS No 116 fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake flu id Brake booster Brake pedal If the brake booster does not operate as described in the following have it checked by your SUBARU dealer 1 With the engine off depress the brake pedal several times applying the same pedal force each time The distance the pedal travels should not vary 2 With the brake pedal depressed start the engine The pedal s
159. cation instructions and precautions e When stowing a flat tire in the spare tire holder turn the hoist shaft end only slowly If it is turned quickly the wheel disc of the flat tire could be damaged e A full size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only After having the flat tire repaired immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire Remember that the tread width of a flat tire is wider than that of the temporary spare tire When carry ing a flat tire stowed in the spare tire holder make sure the tire does not touch any obstacles Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels In a sudden stop or collisions loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury Store the tire and all tools in the proper place E Tire pressure monitoring sys tem TPMS G gt The tire pressure monitoring system pro vides the driver with the warning message indicated by sending a signal from a sen sor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven Also this system may not react immedi ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a blow out caused running over a sharp object 700318 If the low tire pressure warning light comes on while driving never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead
160. caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle While riding in the vehicle infants and small children should always be placed in one of the rear seat ing positions recommended in this owner s manual in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the child s age height and weight If a child is too big for a child restraint system the child should sit in a REAR seat and be restrained using the seat belts According to accident sta tistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat Put children aged 12 and under in a REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint de vice or in a seatbelt The SRS air bag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improp erly restrained Because children are lighter and weaker than adults their risk of being injured from deployment is greater NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLAC ING THE CHILD S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the rear Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out Refer to the Door l
161. ccording to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn during sudden braking or under other similar conditions Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving an All Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri ous accident 800004 All Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels AWD vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery wet or snow covered roads and when moving out of mud dirt and sand By shifting power between the front and rear wheels SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force during decel eration Therefore your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system you should keep the fol lowing tips in mind e An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle There is little difference in handling how ever during extremely sharp turns or sud den braking Therefore when driving down a slope or turning corners be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an am ple distance from other vehicles e When replacing a tire make sure you use only the same size circumference construction brand and load range as the original tires listed on
162. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 6 Tire care maintenance and safety practices 13 7 Vehicle load limit how to determine 13 8 Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capachtiesS xc seco eee cect ee 13 10 Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires 00 13 11 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 13 11 Uniform tire quality grading standards 13 12 LC OT TEE 13 12 Traction AA A B EE 13 12 Temperature A B ou eeeccceeessesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 13 12 Reporting safety defects USA c ceeeeeeeeeees 13 13 13 2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects For U S A The following information has been com piled according to Code of Federal Regu lations Title 49 Part 575 Tire information E Tire labeling Many markings e g Tire size Tire Identification Number or TIN are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers These marking can provide you with useful information on the tire v Tire size Your vehicle comes equipped with P Metric tire size It is important to un derstand the sizing system in select ing the proper tire for your vehicles Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its indi vidual elements Vv P Metric With the P Metric system Section Width is measured in millimeters To convert millimeters into inches divide by 25 4
163. ck to the upright position Move the seatback as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control Front passenger s seat Adjust the seat back to the upright position Move the seat as far back as possible 2 Sit well back in the seat 3 Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly Do not let it get twisted If the belt stops before reaching the buckle return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly If the belt still cannot be unlocked let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull then pull it out slowly again R 100102 4 Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 19 NN 5 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt 6 Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips not on your waist 100103 CONTINUED 1 20 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags V Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height 100374 The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver front passenger To lower the an chor height push the release button and slide the anchor down To raise the an chor height slide the anchor up Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching
164. cle we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting him or her to the applicable section in this owner s manual Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 47 CONTINUED 1 48 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags Vv Components 100644 1 Airbag control module including impact sensors Frontal airbag module driver s side Frontal airbag module front passen ger s side Front sub sensor left hand side Front sub sensor right hand side Side airbag module driver s side Side airbag module front passenger s side 8 Side airbag sensor center pillar left hand side 9 Side airbag sensor center pillar right hand side 10 Airbag wiring yellow 11 Seatbelt pretensioner driver s side 12 Seatbelt pretensioner front passenger s side 13 Curtain airbag sensor rear wheel house right hand side 14 Curtain airbag sensor rear wheel house left hand side 15 Curtain airbag module right side 16 Curtain airbag module left side 17 Seatbelt buckle switch front passen ger s side 18 Seatbelt buckle switch driver s side 19 Driver s seat position sensor 20 Front passenger s seatbelt tension sen sor 21 Front passenger s occupant detection system weight sensor 22 Front passenger s occupant detection control module 23 Front passenger s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator 24 SRS airbag system warning light E Subaru advanced frontal air bag sys
165. cle into the P position 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Turn off unnecessary lights and acces sories 3 Shift the selector lever to the P or N position preferably P position The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the P or N position 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ON po sition and check the operation of the warn ing and indicator lights Refer to the Warning and indicator lights section chapter 3 5 Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelera tor pedal Release the key immediately af ter the engine has started If the engine does not start try the follow ing 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait for at least 10 sec onds After checking that the parking brake is firmly set turn the ignition switch to the START position while de pressing the accelerator pedal slightly approximately a quarter of the full stroke Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts 2 If this fails to start the engine turn the ignition switch back to the OFF posi tion and wait for at least 10 seconds Then fully depress the accelerator ped al and turn the ignition switch to the START position If the engine starts quickly release the accelerator pedal 3 If this fails to start the engine turn the ignition switch again to the OFF posi tion A
166. codes erased and re regis tered when a new key is made Therefore all of your vehicle s keys must be present ed when a new key is registered Any key that is not re registered when a new key is made cannot be used after the other keys are re registered For information on re placement keys and on the registration of keys with your immobilizer system con tact your SUBARU dealer Door locks E Locking and unlocking from the outside 200703 To lock the driver s door from the outside with the key turn the key toward the front To unlock the door turn the key toward the rear Lift the outside door handle to open an un locked door 200704 Locking without the key To lock the door from the outside without the key rotate the lock lever rearward and then close the door 200705 Locking without the key To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch push the 9 sides of the switch and then close the door In this case all closed doors and the rear gate are locked at the same time Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are locked before leaving your vehicle NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside without the key E Locking and unlocking from the inside Keep all doors locked when you drive especially when small chil dren are in your vehicle Along with the p
167. contain ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the subfloor storage com partment Vv 5 seater models 600488 600436 Hang the hook provided on the underside of the rear half lid on the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open Vv 7 seater models 600518 Hang the hook provided on the underside of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open Interior equipment 6 13 HomeLink Wireless Control System if equipped 600429 HomeLink buttons Indicator light Hand held transmitter Not part of your vehicle s keyless entry system but of a HomeLink compatible device The HomeLink Wireless Control Sys tem located on the driver s sun visor is a handy way to operate from inside of your vehicle up to three remote controlled in door and outdoor devices such as garage door openers entrance gates door locks home lighting and security systems There are three HomeLink buttons on the sun visor each of which you can pro WN A Sew CONTINUED 6 144 interior equipment gram for operation of one desired device For details on the device types which can be operated by this system consult the HomeLink website at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 Note the following about this system If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink Wireless Control System it compl
168. d down to a walking pace or less and ap proach the curbs as squarely as possi ble Also make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the vehicle e If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find it difficult to steer the ve hicle in a straight line one of the tires and or wheels may be damaged Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected E Tire pressures and wear Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires service lives and is essential for good running perfor mance Check and if necessary adjust the pressure of each tire including the spare at least once a month for example during a fuel stop and before any long journey Maintenance and service 1 1 25 B00326 Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard The tire placard is located on the door pillar on the driver s side Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures Also the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehi cle When a tire becomes warm the air inside it expands causing the tire pressure to in crease Be careful not to mistakenly re lease air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure CONTINUED 1 1 26 Maintenanc
169. d lower the head restraints to improve rearward visibility V Center seat The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position Be fore sitting on the seat raise the head restraint to an appropriate po sition depending on your sitting height To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower it push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is clos est to the top of the occupant s ears When the center seat is not occupied low er the head restraint to improve rearward visibility E Armrest 100675 To lower the armrest pull on the strap of the armrest AAWARNING To avoid the possibility of serious injury passengers must never be al lowed to sit on the center armrest while the vehicle is in motion Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 11 Third row seat 7 seater models Seatbelts provide maximum re straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions If you do so the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the ab domen will increase and both can result in serious internal injury or death CONTINUED 1 12 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 100094 Never stack l
170. d cause death or serious injury Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn during sudden braking or under other similar conditions CONTINUED 8 6 Driving tips e Whenever strong crosswinds are present slow down sufficiently to maintain control of your vehicle Remember that your vehicle with its higher profile and center of gravity is more likely to be affect ed by crosswinds than ordinary passenger cars e Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving an All Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a seri ous accident Your B9 TRIBECA is classified as a utility vehicle Utility vehicles feature a higher ground clearance which enables them to be used for wide applications including off road driving but a higher center of gravity in relation to the tread width as compared with ordinary passenger cars makes vehicles of this type more likely to roll over In reality utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles The high ground clear ance of this vehicle is a real advantage giving you a better view of the road and al lowing you to anticipate problems earlier However remember that your utility vehi cle is not designed for high speed corner ing comparable to ordinary passenger cars and that your vehicle could roll over if you
171. d clearance is reduced 233 900209 1 Tread wear indicator bar 2 Indicator location mark e When the wear indicator appears on the tread replace the tire e The temporary spare tire must be used only on a rear wheel If a front wheel tire gets punctured replace the wheel with a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel Flat tires If you have a flat tire while driving never brake suddenly keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place E Changing a flat tire e Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface The jack can come out of the jack ing point or sink into the ground and this can result in a severe ac cident Use only the jack provided with your vehicle The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire Never get un der the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack e Always turn off the engine before raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in a severe acci dent 1 Park on a hard level surface whenev er possible then stop the engine 2 Set the parking brake securely and shift in the P Park position 3 Turnon the hazard warning flasher and have everyone get
172. d if necessary add more engine oil E Recommended grade and viscosity Use only engine oil with the recom mended grade and viscosity Oil grade ILSAC GF 4 which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark Starburst mark or API classification SM with the words ENERGY CONSERVING These recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either or both of the following marks displayed on the oil container B00014 ILSAC Certification Mark Starburst Mark Maintenance and service 1 1 9 B00446 API Service label 1 Indicates the oil quality by API designa tions 2 Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade 3 Indicates that the oil has fuel saving ca pabilities In choosing an oil you want the proper quality and viscosity as well as one that will add to fuel economy The following ta ble lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures When adding oil different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU CONTINUED 1 1 1 0 Maintenance and service C 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 tr 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 lt 5W 30 10W 30 10W 40 gt B00016 SAE viscosity number and applicable temperature 5W 30 is recommended Engine oil viscosity thickness affects fuel economy Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy Ho
173. dow halfway pull the switch up lightly 200729 To close Pull the switch up lightly and hold it The window will close as long as the switch is held V Operating the passengers windows 200730 To open the passengers windows push the appropriate switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired posi tion To close the window pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired po sition V Locking the passengers windows 200732 To lock the passengers windows push the lock switch When the lock switch is in the LOCK position the passengers win dows cannot be opened or closed Press the switch again to cancel the pas sengers window locking NOTE When the lock switch is pushed to the LOCK position the indicator lights in the passenger s window switches in cluded in the power window switch cluster on the driver s door all go out YV Passengers side switches 200733 Front passenger s window switch 1 Open 2 Close To open the window push the switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position Keys and doors 2 21 N 200734 Rear passengers window switches 1 Open 2 Close To close the window pull the switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position When the lock switch on the power win dow switch cluster located on the driver s
174. e deterioration of the surface It is recom mended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month or whenever the sur face no longer repels water If the appearance of the paint has dimin ished to the point where the luster or tone cannot be restored lightly polish the sur face with a fine grained compound Never polish just the affected area but include the surrounding area as well Always pol ish in only one direction A No 2000 grain compound is recommended Never use a coarse grained compound Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain size number and could damage the paint After polishing with a compound coat with wax to restore the original luster Frequent polishing with a compound or an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the under coat When in doubt it is always best to contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist NOTE Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles with wax when waxing the vehicle E Cleaning aluminum wheels e Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any kind of grime or agent If dirt is left on too long it may be difficult to clean off e Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels Be sure to use a neutral clean ing agent and later rinse thoroughly with water Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high speed washing device e Clean the vehicle including the alumi n
175. e the following steps 1 Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down 2 Have someone place wheel blocks un der both the vehicle and trailer wheels 3 When the wheel blocks are in place re lease the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load 4 Apply the regular brakes and then ap ply the parking brake slowly release the regular brakes 5 Shift into P and shut off the engine Driving tips 8 25 In case of emergency If you park your vehicle in an emergency 9 2 Spar tre ee Ee 9 2 Removing the Spare tire REENEN 9 3 Re storage Of Spare tire ENEE 9 5 Temporary spare tire cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 6 EE 9 7 Changing a flat tire ececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 9 7 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 9 10 Jump starting 2a sce caccececececetetacettenncteeaseceerenceeteetes 9 11 How to jump start NA 9 12 Engine overheating sceseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeneees 9 14 If steam is coming from the engine compartment eeeeeeee cece cece eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeees 9 14 If no steam is coming from the engine compartment EE TOWING W Towing and tie down hooks Using a flat bed truck REENEN Towing with all wheels on the ground 9 18 Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be fl teteg EE 9 18 Maintenance tools Nees EEN EEENE 9 19 Jack and jack handle SEENEN EEN 9 19 9 2 In case of emergency If you p
176. e Brakes could overheat and fail e Suspension bearings axles and other parts of the body could break or experience accelerated wear that will shorten vehicle life e Tires could fail e Tread separation could occur e Tire could separate from its rim E Steps for Determining Cor rect Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The com bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug gage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 lbs 68 kg passengers in your vehi cle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1 400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safe ly exceed the available cargo and lug gage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trail er load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduc es the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 13 12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Uniform t
177. e and service NOTE e The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4 3 psi 30 kPa 0 3 kgf cm when the tire becomes warm e The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than one mile 1 6 km Do not let air out of warm tires to ad just pressure Doing so will result in low tire pressure Incorrect tire pressures detract from con trollability and ride comfort and they cause the tires to wear abnormally e Correct tire pressure tread worn evenly B00050 Roadholding is good and steering is re sponsive Rolling resistance is low so fuel consumption is also lower e Abnormally low tire pressure tread worn at shoulders B00051 Rolling resistance is high so fuel con sumption is also higher e Abnormally high tire pressure tread worn in center B00052 Ride comfort is poor Also the tire magni fies the effects of road surface bumps and dips possibly resulting in vehicle damage Driving at high speeds with exces sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot A sharp in crease in temperature could cause tread separation and destruction of the tires The resulting loss of vehi cle control could lead to an acci dent E Wheel balance Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new but the wheels will bec
178. e brake boost er resulting in poor braking power The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops CONTINUED 7 16 Starting and operating functioning If this happens however you will have to push the pedal much harder than normal and the braking distance will increase NOTE Some sound accompanying operation of the vacuum pump may be heard from the engine compartment during driving This does not indicate a fault E Disc brake pad wear warning indicators DA 700040 The disc brake pad wear warning indica tors on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking imme diately have your vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer ABS Anti lock Brake Sys tem Always use the utmost care in driv ing overconfidence because you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a seri ous accident e The ABS system does not always decrease stopping distance You should always maintain a safe fol lowing distance from other vehi cles e When driving on badly surfaced roads gravel roads icy road or over deep newly fallen snow stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without When driving under these conditions therefore reduce your speed and leave am ple distance from other vehicles
179. e extension MP3 to the name of any non MP3 file Doing so could lead to speaker damage e The system does not support multi ses sion recording so disc at once recording is recommended e The system does not support packet writing software e The system does not have a playlist function e The system may not be able to display and play certain MP3 files depending on CONTINUED 5 26 Audio the writing software and CD recorder e Recording must be performed using a file system supported by the audio sys tem Otherwise the audio system may not play the MP3 files and may not display folder titles and file titles E Supported file systems The audio system supports the following file systems e ISO 9660 Level 1 Level 2 e Apple Extension to ISO 9660 e Joliet e Romeo NOTE The audio system does not support the following file systems e Apple HFS e UDF 1 50 e Mix CD CD Extra E Compression format e MPEG 1 audio layer 3 MP3 Bit rate 32 kbps 320 kbps Sampling frequency 32 44 1 48 kHz e MPEG 2 audio layer 3 MP3 Bit rate 8 kbps 160 kbps Sampling frequency 16 22 05 24 kHz E Numbers of folders and files e Maximum number of folders 255 in cluding root folder e Maximum number of files 999 maxi mum number in one folder 255 e Maximum number of layers 8 NOTE e Not all of the discs stored in MP3 files may be able to be played back e Even if a folder contai
180. e fan speed of the rear air condi tioner can be adjusted using the rear air conditioner dial behind the center console The fan speed can be adjusted in four steps by turning the dial Turn the dial to the OFF position to stop the fan NOTE e When the A C button is in the OFF position and when the A C in dicator is not illuminated during AUTO mode operation the air conditioner compressor does not operate mean ing that the system merely blows un cooled air out of the ventilators e The outlet air temperature of the rear air conditioner cannot be adjusted e The rear air conditioner cannot be used as a heater E Temperature sensors 400517 1 Interior air temperature sensor 2 Solar sensor The automatic climate control system em ploys several sensors These sensors are delicate If they are treated incorrectly and become damaged the system may not be able to control the interior temperature correctly To avoid damaging the sensors observe the following precautions Do not subject the sensors to impact Keep water away from the sensors Climate control 4 9 Do not cover the sensors The sensors are located as follows Solar sensor beside windshield de froster grille Interior air temperature sensor on the side of the driver side part of the center panel Outside temperature sensor behind front grille 4 1 0 Climate control Operating t
181. e low tire pressure warning light comes on while driving never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place Otherwise an acci dent involving serious vehicle dam age and serious personal injury could occur Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire plac ard on the door pillar on the driver s side Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance the tires get warm and their pressures increase accordingly Be sure to let the tires cool thoroughly before adjusting their pressures to the standard val ues shown on the tire placard Re fer to the Tires and wheels section in chapter 11 The tire pressure monitoring system does not func tion when the vehicle is stationary After adjusting the tire pressures increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph 32 km h to start the TPMS re checking of the tire infla tion pressures If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pres sure threshold the low tire pressure warning light should go off a few minutes later If this light still comes on while driv ing after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim i
182. e parking light switch operates regard less of the ignition switch position By pushing the front end of this switch fol lowing lights will come on Parking lights Front side marker lights Tail lights License plate lights To turn off push the rear end of the park ing light switch Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because that will run down the bat tery 300512 The front fog lights operate only when the light switch is in the Z0 position However the front fog lights turn off when the headlights are switched to high beam To turn on the front fog lights turn the fog light switch on the turn signal lever upward to the 0 position To turn off the front fog lights turn the switch back down to the OFF position Instruments and controls 3 29 Wiper and washer e In freezing weather be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window be fore switching on the wipers At tempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out If the wiper blades are frozen to the window glass be sure to operate the defroster wiper deicer if equipped or rear window defog ger before turning on the wiper In freezing weather do not use the windshield washer until the wind shield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster Otherw
183. e passive mode the system can also be armed with the remote transmitter or with the power door locking switches If the remote transmitter or power door lock ing switch is used to lock the vehicle arm ing will take place immediately regardless of whether or not the passive mode has been selected V Disarming the system To disarm the system briefly press the W button on the transmitter E Tripped sensor identification The security indicator light flashes when the alarm system has been triggered Al so the number of flashes indicates the lo cation of unauthorized intrusion or the se verity of impact on the vehicle e When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator light will light for 1 second and then flash as follows When a door or rear gate was opened 5 times When the ignition switch was turned to the ON position by using a key not reg istered with your immobilizer system 3 times When a strong impact or multiple im pacts were sensed twice only vehicles with shock sensors dealer option When a light impact was sensed once only vehicles with shock sensors deal er option E Shock sensors dealer op tion The shock sensors trigger the alarm sys tem when they sense impacts applied to the vehicle and when any of their electric wires is cut The alarm system causes the horn to sound and the turn signal lights to flash for a short time when the sensed im pact is w
184. e wheels respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control e Traction Control Function The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfaces thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control Activation of this function is shown by steady illumination of the Vehicle Dynam ics Control operation indicator light e Skid Suppression Function The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels tendency to slide sideways during steering operations Acti vation of this function is shown by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light NOTE e Slight twitching of the brake pedal may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system operates a small de gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak ing may also be noticed in this situa tion These are normal characteristics of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation and are no cause for alarm e When driving off immediately after starting the engine a short lived oper ation noise may be noticed coming from the engine compartment This noise is generated as a result of a check being performed on the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and is nor mal e Depending on the timing of activa tion of the brakes certain situations may occur just after driving off where the brake pedal seems to exhibit a jolt ing motion Thi
185. eak but it warns of a strong im pact or multiple impacts by sounding the horn and flashing the turn signal lights both lasting approximately 30 seconds If you desire your SUBARU dealer can connect them and set them for activation or deactivation NOTE e The shock sensors are not always able to sense impacts caused by breaking in and cannot sense an im pact that does not cause vibration such as breaking the glass using a rescue hammer e The shock sensors may sense vibra tion like those shown in the following and trigger the alarm system Select the settings of the alarm system and shock sensors appropriately depend ing on where you usually park your ve hicle Example Vibration from construction site Vibration in multistory car park Vibration from trains e You can have the sensitivity of the shock sensors adjusted to your prefer ence by your SUBARU dealer Child safety locks Windows Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the rear Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opened the door and fell out 200726 Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being opened even if the inside door handle is pulled When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position the door cannot be opened from inside regardless of the position of the inner door handle lock lever The door can only be opened from the outside E Power wind
186. ear wiper is not in use turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever downward to the D position The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob Windshield wiper deicer 300515 The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON po sition Before turning on the windshield wiper de icer remove any snow from the wind shield To turn on the windshield wiper de icer push the button The indicator light located on the button lights up while the windshield wiper deicer is operating The windshield wiper deicer will automati cally shut off after approximately 15 min utes If the windshield wiper blades have been deiced completely before that time push the button to turn it off It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position If deicing is not complete you have to push the button to turn the deicer on again Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind shield wiper deicer for continuous opera tion Contact your SUBARU dealer for de tails Once the windshield wiper deicer has been set for continuous operation press ing the button results in continuous opera tion The windshield wiper deicer automat ically stops operating if any one of the fol lowing conditions occurs during continu ous operation e The outside temperature becomes 41 F 5 C or higher e The vehicle speed remain
187. earward by releasing the lock that stops it To do this simultaneously pull the lever under the outboard seat cushion and turn the lever on the side of the seat cush ion outward when sliding the seat or seat pair Once you have released the lock you can slide the seat or seat pair back and forth with only the lever under the seat cushion pulled If you slide the seat or seat pair for ward of the lock point you will need to re lease the lock again before you can slide it behind the point Then release the lever and move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is se curely locked into place If you slide the seat or seat pair aft of the lock point while the third row seat is occupied be careful not to trap the legs of the third row pas sengers E Reclining the seatback 100085 To prevent the passenger from slid ing under the seatbelt in the event of a collision always put the seatback in the upright position while the ve hicle is in motion Also do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback If you do so the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase and both can result in serious inter nal injury or death In a 7 seater model vehicle never al low the third row seat passengers to adjust the seatback of the second row Doing so is dangerous as the seatback will tilt rapidly and could inj
188. eat does not function cor rectly e g it is activated even when the front passenger s seat is empty or it is de activated even when the front passenger has not fastened his her seatbelt take the following actions e Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and its child occupant e Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket If still the seatbelt warning device for front passenger s seat does not function cor rectly after taking relevant corrective ac tions described above immediately con tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec tion Instruments and controls 3 1 1 E SRS airbag system warn AIR ing light BAG When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the SRS airbag system warning light will come on for approxi mately six seconds and go out This shows the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pretensioners are in normal oper ation If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre tensioners and or SRS airbag sys tem Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked Unless checked and properly repaired the seatbelt pretensioners and or SRS airbags will operate improperly e g SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi nor collision or not inflate in a se vere collision which may increase the risk of
189. eck the battery and cables Cold tem peratures reduce battery capacity The battery must be in good condition to pro vide enough power for cold winter starts Use an engine oil of proper grade and vis cosity for cold weather Heavy summer oil will cause harder starting Keep the door locks from freezing by CONTINUED 8 8 Driving tips squirting them with deicer or glycerin Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door If the door is frozen use hot water to melt the ice and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away Use a windshield washer fluid that con tains an antifreeze solution Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes be cause they may damage the paint of the vehicle SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con tains 58 5 methyl alcohol and 41 5 surfactant by volume Its freezing temper ature varies according to how much it is di luted as indicated in the following table Washer Fluid Freezing Concentration Temperature 30 10 4 F 12 C 50 4 F 20 C 100 49 F 45 C In order to prevent freezing of washer flu id check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid con centration to the outside temperature If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by op
190. edure re place the wiper blades with new ones Refer to the Replacement of wiper blades section chapter 11 for re placement instructions E Windshield wiper and washer switches The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Y Windshield wipers OFF Park W Intermittent LO Low speed HI High speed To turn the wipers on push the wiper con trol lever down To turn the wipers off return the lever to the OFF position V Mist for a single wipe 300288 For a single wipe of the wipers pull the le ver toward you The wipers operate until you release the lever V Wiper intermittent time control 300287 When the wiper switch is in the 7 po sition turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper The operating interval can be adjusted in nine steps The intermittent operation interval varies depending on the vehicle speed in any of the adjustment steps longer when the ve hicle speed is low shorter when the vehi cle speed is high YV Washer 300289 To wash the windshield push the washer button at the end of the wiper control le ver The washer fluid sprays until you re lease the washer button The wipers oper ate while you push the button Instruments and controls 3 31 NOTE 300544 The windshield washer fluid warning light comes on when the washer fluid level i
191. ees 1 12 Folding down the seatback c cccsssssseeeeeeeeees 1 13 Head restraint adjustment seeeesseeeeeeeeees 1 14 DO ALD GIES ee EEN 1 15 Seatbelt Safety Ups cccessceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 15 Emergency Locking Retractor ELR 1 16 Automatic Emergency Locking Retractor AR EE 1 16 Seatbelt warning light and chime En 1 17 Fastening the Seatbelt c csscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 18 Seatbelt maintenance ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 26 Front seatbelt pretensioners REENEN 1 27 System le 1 28 System servicing 22 cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 1 29 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags Precautions against vehicle modification 1 29 Child restraint systems cccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 1 30 Where to place a child restraint system 1 31 Choosing a child restraint system ue 1 33 Installing child restraint systems with A ELR UE EEN 1 33 Installing a booster seat ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 37 Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages LATCH 1 38 Top tether anchorages eesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 41 SRS airbag Supplemental Restraint System AIP DAG sich aaa araea a a a tek needed 1 44 Your vehicle s SRS configuration En 1 44 Subaru advanced frontal airbag system 1 49 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain ai
192. eight 165 Ibs 75 kg 705 Ibs 320 kg Occupant Cargo 22 Ibs 10 kg 176 Ibs 80 kg Trailer hitch Tongue load 1 069 Ibs 485 kg 2 Calculate the available load capac ity CONTINUED 13 10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Available Load Capacity 1 157lbs _ 1 069 lbs 525 kg 485 kg Vehicle Total weight Capacity weight 88 Ibs 40 kg 3 The result of step 2 shows that a further 88 lbs 40 kg of cargo can be carried Example 2B D00104 For example if a person weighing 143 Ibs 65 kg and a child weighing 40 Ibs 18 kg now enter the same vehicle bringing the number of occupants to three and a child restraint system weighing 11 Ibs 5 kg is installed in the vehicle for the child to use the cal culations are as follows 1 Calculate the total weight Total weight _ 165 lbs 143 Ibs 40 Ibs 75 kg 65 kg 18 kg Occupant 11 Ibs 5 kg 705 Ibs 320 kg Child restraint Cargo 22 Ibs 10 kg 176 lbs 80 kg Trailer hitch Tongue load 1 263 Ibs 573 kg 2 Calculate the available load capac ity Available Load Capacity 1 157lbs 1 263 Ibs 525 kg 573 kg Vehicle Total weight capacity weight 105 Ibs 48 kg 3 The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 105 Ibs 48 kg so the cargo weight must be reduced by 105 Ibs 48 kg or more E Determining compatibility of
193. el cut function will op erate Shift up if this happens Also the transmission may automatically shift up to protect the engine e If you attempt to shift down when the engine speed is too high i e when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone beeps will be emitted to warn you that the down shift is not possible e If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low the transmis sion will not respond e You can perform a skip shift for ex ample from 4th to 2nd by operating the selector lever twice in rapid suc cession e The transmission automatically se lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving e If the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid becomes too high the AT OIL TEMP warning light will come on and upshifts to 5th gear will not be possible Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the en gine idle until the warning light goes off E Maximum speeds When down shifting ensure that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the gear which is about to be selected Failure to observe this precaution can lead to engine over revving and this in turn can result in engine damage In addition sudden application of engine braking caused by down shifting when the vehicle is travel ling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking as a consequence control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk
194. emperature setting is shown on the display With the dial set at your desired temperature the system au tomatically adjusts the temperature of air supplied from the outlets such that the de sired temperature is achieved and main tained Turning the dial counterclockwise and re leasing it reduces the temperature by 1 F 0 5 C Turning the dial clockwise and re leasing it increases the temperature by 1 F 0 5 C Holding the dial in either turned position causes the temperature to change continuously With the minimum temperature set the system gives maximum cooling perfor mance With the maximum temperature set the system gives maximum heating performance v W Defroster button FRONT QS Z To defrost or dehumidify the windshield and front door windows push the defrost er button W When the Mu button is pushed regardless whether the air con ditioner is operating or not outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment the air conditioner compressor turns on air flow is directed towards the windshield and front door windows and the indicator light on the button comes on After eliminating the fogging from the windshield return the climate control sys tem to the AUTO mode by pushing the AUTO button or turn off by pushing the OFF button Alternatively push the W button again to return the system to the setting that was selected before you activated the
195. en not in use always keep the cup holder stored while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an acci dent vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead Do not pick up a cup from the cup console holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving as this may P 600414 distract you and lead to an acci dent When your vehicle is parked in the sun or on a warm day the inside of the overhead console heats up Avoid storing plastic or other heat The rear console is located in the back of the center console box Pull it out to use it Take care to avoid spills Bever ages if hot might burn you or your passengers Spilled bever E Overhead console ages may also damage upholstery or carpets E Front passenger s cup holder V Center console The dual cup holder is built into the center console near the parking brake lever Om 600417 To access the cup holder push the re lease button Vv Door pocket 600418 The door pockets can be used to hold beverage bottles and other items When placing a beverage in a door pocket make sure it is capped Oth erwise the beverage could spill when opening closing the door or while driving and if the beverage is hot it could scald you Interior equipment 6 7 E Rear seat 5 seater models Second row seat 7 seater models passenger
196. er You will find their indications hard to see if you wear po larized glasses Combination meter illumina tion When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the various parts of the combination meter are illuminated in the following sequence 1 Warning lights indicator lights meter rims meter needles odometer trip meter and gauge back lights illuminate 2 Meter needles and gauges each show MAX reading 3 Meter needles and gauges each show MIN reading 4 Meter and gauge dials illuminate 5 Regular illumination for driving be gins Instruments and controls 3 5 E Canceling the function for meter needle gauge move ment and combination meter sequential illumination upon turning on the ignition switch fe eg E N III Ne DA e wgl EI J DI 300185 It is possible to activate or deactivate the movement of the meter needles and gauges and sequential illumination of the combination meter that takes place when the ignition switch is turned to the ON po sition Turn the ignition switch to the ACC posi tion With the A trip meter indication se lected briefly press the trip knob twice You can now establish the activated deac tivated setting for movement of the meter needles and gauges when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position To CONTINUED 3 6 Instruments and controls change the current setting press the tr
197. er drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the 100371 To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower it push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is clos est to the top of the occupant s ears When the seats are not occupied lower the head restraints to improve rearward visibility The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position Be fore sitting on the seat raise the head restraint to an appropriate po sition depending on your sitting height Seatbelts Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 15 E Seatbelt safety tips e All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move Otherwise the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint Loose fit ting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury Each seatbelt is designed to sup port only one person Never use a single belt for two or more per sons even children Otherwise in an accident serious injury or death could result Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardwa
198. erate normally Starting and operating 7 17 e The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph 12 km h The warning light comes on dur ing driving If these occur have the ABS system repaired at the first available oppor tunity by your SUBARU dealer NOTE If the warning light behavior is as de scribed in the following the ABS sys tem may be considered normal e The warning light comes on right af ter the engine is started but goes out immediately remaining off e The warning light remains on after the engine has been started but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 8 mph 12 km h e The warning light comes on during driving but it goes out immediately and remains off When driving with an insufficient battery CONTINUED 7 18 Starting and operating voltage such as when the engine is jump started the ABS warning light may come on This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction When the battery becomes fully charged the light will go out Electronic Brake Force Dis tribution EBD system The EBD system maximizes the effective ness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the
199. erating the washer for a certain period of time Otherwise if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside tem perature it may freeze and block the noz zles Adjust the washer fluid concentra tion appropriately for the outside temperature If the concentration is inappropriate sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank V Before driving your vehicle Before entering the vehicle remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and dan gerous While warming up the vehicle before driv ing check that the accelerator pedal brake pedal and all other controls operate smoothly Clear away ice and snow that has accu mulated under the fenders to avoid mak ing steering difficult During severe winter driving stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders period ically V Parking in cold weather Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running Do not use the parking brake when park ing for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that position Instead ob serve the following 1 Place the selector lever in P position 2 Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from movin
200. erning the seatbelt pretensioner see the Front seatbelt pre tensioners section in this chapter e To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident the driv er and all passengers in the vehi cle should always wear seatbelts when the vehicle is moving The SRS airbag is designed only as a supplement to the primary protec tion provided by the seatbelt It does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts In combination with the seatbelts it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the ve hicle has the SRS airbag Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 45 For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system see the Seatbelts section in this chapter Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag Because the SRS airbag deploys with con siderable speed faster than the blink of an eye and force to pro tect in high speed collisions the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in prop er position such as one thrown forward during pre accident brak ing Even when properly positioned there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruise
201. ertrain component en gine transmission differential wheel bearings etc for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving E Maximum load limits Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following Ex ceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and or vehicle damage e Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1 000 Ibs 453 kg total weight e Before towing a trailer check the trailer total weight GVW GAWs and tongue load Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are acceptable V Total trailer weight 800211 Total trailer weight The total trailer weight trailer weight plus its cargo load must never exceed the maximum weight shown in the following table Vehicle without cooling kit When towing a trailer without brakes 1 000 Ibs 453 kg When towing a trailer with brakes 2 000 Ibs 906 kg When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade con tinuously for over 5 miles 8 km with an outside temperature of 104 F 40 C or above 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Vehicle with cooling kit When towing a trailer without brakes 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg When towing a trailer with brakes When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade con tinuously for over 5 miles 8 km with an outside temperature of 104 F 40 C or above 1 750 Ibs 794 kg
202. es eet Built in CD changer operation ccceseeeeeeeeees Audio Control buttons ccceceeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees Precautions to observe when handling a compact diS wes alien 5 23 MP 3 AUCIO viii sie Si eee ens 5 25 Whats MPS csccasccrnsccsessadcassaieencotics sasstiaaaaaaisenaetaaesd 5 25 Creating MP3 files gedu SCEEN EEEER concacesets cease 5 25 Saving MP3 files ON a CISC ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 25 Supported file systems REENEN ENEE 5 26 Compression format see 5 26 Numbers of folders and files een 5 26 Copyright SSues 22 2002 nce eens 5 26 5 2 Audio Antenna system E Printed antenna Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra sives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the antenna is printed Doing so may damage the antenna printed on the window 500200 The antenna is printed on the inner sur face of the rear window glass NOTE Antenna performance will deteriorate significantly if you apply tinting film or any other material over the antenna portion of the rear window glass E FM reception Although FM is normally static free recep tion can be affected by the surrounding ar ea atmospheric conditions station strength and transmitter distance Build ings or other obstructions may cause mo mentary static flutter or station interfer ence If reception continues to be unsatis factory switch to a stronger stati
203. ess than 0 5 second the title will be scrolled so you can see all of it You will see eight characters at a time NOTE The display is designed to show titles Audio 5 21 for up to three pages 64 characters in total V Folder selection MP3 disc Press the a side of the SEEK FLDR button 4 briefly to select the next folder Pressing the yv side of the same button the first time makes the player go back to the beginning of the currently selected file pressing it a second time makes it go back to the previously selected file NOTE Only MP3 folders are recognized when an attempt to select the next or previ ous folder is made If no appropriate folder exists on the disc pressing the a or y side of the SEEK FLDR button has no effect YV How to unload CDs from the player V Ejecting a CD from the player Of the discs loaded you can select and re move only one disc 1 Use the disc select button 9 to select the disc to be ejected 2 Briefly press the button 8 The selected disc will be ejected The disc number indicator will flash at this time When you remove the ejected disc the disc number indicator will go off To remove more discs in succession re CONTINUED 5 22 Audio peat Steps 1 and 2 V Ejecting all discs from the player All disc ejection mode 1 If you continue to press the but ton 8 the player will produce beep sound and
204. essure warning light any in crease in the tire pressures caused by an increase in the outside air temperature or by an increase in the temperature in the tires can cause the low tire pressure warn ing light to go off System resetting is necessary when the wheels are changed for example a switch to snow tires and new TPMS valves are installed on the newly fitted wheels Have this work performed by a SUBARU dealer following wheel replace ment It may not be possible to install TPMS valves on certain wheels that are on the market Therefore if you change the wheels for example a switch to snow tires use wheels that have the same part number as the standard equipment wheels Without four operational TPMS valve sensors on the wheels the TPMS will not fully function and the warning light in the instrument panel will flash When a tire is replaced adjustments are necessary to ensure continued normal op eration of the tire pressure monitoring sys tem As with wheel replacement there fore you should have the work performed by a SUBARU dealer If the low tire pressure warning light does not come on briefly after the ig nition switch is turned ON or the light is flashing you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible If this light comes on while driving never brake suddenly and keep driv ing straight ahead while gradually reducing speed Then slowly p
205. esult of step 2 shows that a further 121 Ibs 55 kg of cargo can be carried Example 1B D00102 For example if a person weighing 176 Ibs 80 kg now enters the same vehi cle bringing the number of occupants to two the calculations are as fol lows 1 Calculate the total weight Total weight 154 Ibs 70 kg 176 Ibs 80 kg Occupant 882 Ibs 400 kg Cargo 1 212 Ibs 550 kg Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13 9 2 Calculate the available load capac ity Available Load Capacity 1 157 lbs 1 212 Ibs 525 kg 550 kg Vehicle Total weight capacity weight 55 Ibs 25 kg 3 The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 55 Ibs 25 kg so the cargo weight must be reduced by 55 Ibs 25 kg or more Example 2A D00103 Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 1 157 Ibs 525 kg which is indicat ed on the vehicle placard with the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 525 kg or 1 157 Ibs For example the vehicle has one oc cupant weighing 165 Ibs 75 kg plus cargo weighing 705 Ibs 320 kg In addition the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 Ibs 10 kg to which is attached a trailer weighing 1 764 Ibs 800 kg 10 of the trailer weight is applied to the trailer tongue i e Tongue load 176 Ibs 80 kg 1 Calculate the total weight Total w
206. ety s sake you should employ extra caution when towing a trail er and you should never speed You should also keep the follow ing tips in mind CONTINUED 8 24 Driving tips V Before starting out on a trip e Check that the vehicle and vehicle to hitch mounting are in good condition If any problems are apparent do not tow the trailer e Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trailer attached If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear check the total trailer weight GVW GAWSs and tongue load again then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable e Check that the tire pressures are cor rect e Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly Confirm that the trailer tongue is connected prop erly to the hitch ball the trailer lights connector is connect ed properly and trailer s brake lights illu minate when the vehicle s brake pedal is pressed and that the trailer s turn sig nal lights flash when the vehicle s turn signal lever is operated the safety chains are connected prop erly all cargo in the trailer is secured safe ty in position the side mirrors provide a good rear ward field of view without a significant blind spot e Sufficient time should be taken to learn the feel of the vehicle trailer combination before starting out on atrip In an area free of traffic practice turning stopping a
207. extension plate would obstruct your view of the rearview mirror Vanity mirror with light 600409 To use the vanity mirror swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cov er The light beside the vanity mirror comes on when the mirror cover is opened Storage compartment e Always keep the storage compart ment closed while driving to re duce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an accident Do not store spray cans contain ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment Hi Glove box 600410 1 Lock 2 Unlock To open the glove box pull the handle To close it push the lid firmly upward To lock the glove box insert the key and turn it clockwise E Center console box 600411 The center console box has a two layer structure consisting of an upper compart ment and a lower compartment YV Upper compartment 600412 1 Upper compartment lock release Pull up the upper compartment lock re lease to open the upper compartment Interior equipment 6 5 Y Lower compartment 600413 1 Lower compartment lock release Pull up the lower compartment lock re lease to open the lower compartment CONTINUED 6 6 interior equipment E Rear console To open the console push on the lid light Cup holder ly and it will automatically open e Wh
208. f the fluid has entered your eyes If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed immediately drink a large amount of milk or water and obtain immediate medical help Keep everyone including children away from the battery The gas generated by a battery ex plodes if a flame or spark is brought near it Do not smoke or light a match while jump starting Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen It could cause the battery to burst or explode CONTINUED 9 12 In case of emergency e Whenever working on or around a battery always wear suitable eye protectors and remove metal ob jects such as rings bands or oth er metal jewelry Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are available A running engine can be danger ous Keep your fingers hands clothing hair and tools away from the cooling fan belts and any oth er moving engine parts Remov ing rings watches and ties is ad visable Jump starting is dangerous if it is done incorrectly If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump starting consult a compe tent mechanic When your vehicle does not start due to a run down discharged battery the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery called the booster battery with jumper cables E How to jump start 1 Make sure the booster
209. f there is no passenger on the front pas Sender Ss seat the seatbelt warning device for the front passenger s seat will be deac tivated The front passengers occupant detection system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passen ger s seat Observe the following precautions Failure to do so may prevent the device from func tioning correctly or cause the device to fail e Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback e Do not store a heavy load in the seat back pocket e Do not allow the rear seat second row seat occupant to place his her hands or legs on the front passenger s seatback or allow him her to pull the seatback If the seatbelt warning device for the front passenger s seat does not function cor rectly e g it is activated even when the front passenger s seat is empty or it is de activated even when the front passenger has not fastened his her seatbelt take the following actions e Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and the child occupant e Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket If the seatbelt warning device for front passenger s seat still does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective actions described above immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an in spection E Fastening the seatbelt e Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed In an accident
210. ff the ground while the front wheels are on the ground This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential 900217 If towing is necessary it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service Observe the following pro cedures for safety E Towing and tie down hooks The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency e g to free a stuck vehicle from mud sand or snow e Use only the specified towing hooks and tie down hooks Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie down purposes Never use the tie down hook clos est to the muffler under the vehi cle for towing purposes To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing hooks Front towing hook 1 Take out the towing hook screwdriver and wheel nut wrench from the tool bag In case of emergency 9 15 900218 2 Wrap a flat head screwdriver in vinyl tape or cloth insert it into the gap between the cover and the front bumper and use it to pry the cover open NOTE The cover is attached to the front bumper with five lugs CONTINUED 9 16 In case of emergency 900219 3 Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until the threads can no longer be seen 900220 4 Tighten the towing hook securely us
211. fre quency is reached NOTE While you are holding down either side of the TUNE TRACK button the tuning frequency will not stop changing even if the frequency of a receivable station is reached V Seek tuning SEEK If you press the a or v side of the SEEK FLDR button 6 the radio will auto CONTINUED 5 16 Audio matically search for a receivable station and stop at the first one it finds This func tion may not be available however when radio signals are weak In such a situation perform manual tuning to select the de sired station V Scan tuning SCAN Press the SCAN button 7 to change the radio to the SCAN mode In this mode the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the frequency after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end Press the SCAN button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any dis played frequency Press the a or v side of the SEEK FLDR button 6 again to cancel the scan mode and to stop on any displayed fre quency When the SCAN button is pressed for automatic tuning stations are scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high fre quencies only Automatic tuning may not function proper ly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or proximity to
212. fter waiting for 10 seconds or longer turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing the accelerator pedal 4 If the engine still refuses to start con tact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance 6 Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone out after the engine has started The fuel injection system auto matically lowers the idle speed as the en Starting and operating 7 7 gine warms up While the engine is warming up make sure that the selector lever is at the P or N position and that the parking brake is applied 7 8 Starting and operating Stopping the engine Automatic transmission Do not stop the engine when the ve hicle is moving This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster making steering and braking more difficult It could also result in accidental activation of the LOCK position on the igni tion switch causing the steering wheel to lock The ignition switch should be turned off only when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is idling The automatic transmission is electroni cally controlled and provides 5 forward speeds and 1 reverse speed Also it has a manual mode and a SPORT mode Do not shift from the P or N po sition into the D or R position while depressing the accelerator pedal This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward e Shift into the
213. g When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them When the vehicle has been left parked af ter use on roads heavily covered with snow or has been left parked during a snowstorm icing may develop on the brake system which could cause poor braking action Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle If there is caked snow or ice remove it being careful not to damage the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS har ness V Refueling in cold weather To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weath er Use only additives that are specifically de signed for this purpose When an anti freeze additive is used its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity E Driving on snowy and icy roads Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads This may cause loss of vehi cle control Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms Snow will enter the engine s intake system and may hinder the air flow which could re sult in engine shutdown or even breakdown To prevent skidding and
214. g Je SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 7 Sw FRONT 2 REAR 5 he combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 525kg or 1157Ibs COLD TIRE gt INFLATION PRESSURE 230kPa 33PSI REAR 220kPa 32PSI COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE Va ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P255 55R18 COMPACT SPARE TIRE T165 80R17 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION d EX J D00100 The vehicle placard shows original tire size recommended cold tire infla tion pressure on each tire at maxi mum loaded vehicle weight seating capacity and loading information v Adverse safety consequences of under inflation Driving at high speeds with exces sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot A sharp increase in tem perature could cause tread separa tion and failure of the tire s Possi ble resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident v Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper infla tion Check and if necessary adjust the pressure of each tire including the spare at least once a month and be fore any long journey Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the specific values Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures Also the tire pressures are affected by the outside tempera ture It is best
215. g it could turn the ignition switch from the ON position to the ACC or OFF position thereby stop ping the engine E Key number 200701 1 Key number plate 2 Security ID plate The key number is stamped on the key number plate attached to the key set Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place not in the vehicle This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle For information on making replacement keys for vehicles with the immobilizer sys tem refer to the Immobilizer section in this chapter Immobilizer The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine Only keys registered with your vehicle s immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle Even if an unregistered key fits into the ignition switch and can be turned to the START position the engine will automatically stop after several seconds Each immobilizer key contains a tran sponder in which the key s ID code is stored When a key is inserted into the ig nition switch and turned to the ON posi tion the transponder transmits the key s ID code to the immobilizer system s re ceiver If the transmitted ID code matches the ID code registered in the immobilizer system the system allows the engine to be started Since the ID code is transmit ted and acted upon almost instantly the immobilizer
216. g safety defects USA If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately in form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Subaru of America Inc If NHTSA receives similar com plaints it may open an investiga tion and if it finds that a safety de fect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA can not become involved in individual problems between you your deal er or Subaru of America Inc To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Depart ment of Transportation Washing ton D C 20590 You can also ob tain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline Index 14 2 Index A ABS Anti lock Brake System eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 16 WV ARMING IONE EE 3 15 7 17 ACCESSONES EE 11 38 Accessory power Outlet EEN 6 8 Active head restraint cccccceccecceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeees 1 5 Air cleaner element EEN 11 13 Air filtration EIER Ae EEN 4 11 AOW here Ee eet 4 2 Alarm Syste Mecena a a 2 14 All Wheel Drive warning light eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 17 Aluminum wheels EE 11 29 Antenna system EE 5 2 Anti lock Brake System AB 7 16 Arming the System EE 2 15 atian ie
217. ger s seat the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupant s seating posture If the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag is activated the ON indi cator illuminates while the OFF indica tor extinguishes take the following actions e Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant e Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket If the ON indicator still illuminates while the OFF indicator extinguishes despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken seat the child small adult in the rear seat and immedi ately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection it is rec ommended that on subsequent trips the child small adult always take the rear seat Children who have outgrown a child re straint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated V Conditions in which front passen ger s SRS frontal airbag is activated The front passenger s SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon im pact when any of the following conditions is met regarding the front passenger s seat e When the seat is occupied by an adult e When a heavy article is placed on the seat When the front passenger s seat is occu pied by an adult observe the following precautio
218. gine may on rare occasions knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill This phenomenon does not indicate a problem e A slight reduction in output torque may occur before the engine warms up Starting and operating 7 13 E SPORT mode 700310 SPORT mode is used when power is needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill driving To select this mode move the se lector lever from the D position to the manual gate 700311 CONTINUED 7 14 Starting and operating When selected the SPORT mode indica tor light on the instrument panel will turn on To deselect SPORT mode move the se lector lever to the D position or select manual mode To subsequently reselect SPORT mode move the selector lever to the D position and from there to the man ual gate In this mode the transmission shifts up at higher vehicle speeds and shifts down more responsively than in normal mode E Shift lock release Perform the following steps if the selector lever does not move from the P position even with the release button pressed the brake pedal depressed and the ignition switch in the ON position To override the shift lock 1 Set the parking brake and stop the en gine 2 Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag 700312 3 Remove the cover by prying on the edge with a flat head screwdriver 700313 4 Insert
219. h speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane The re sulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident NOTE For safety inspect the tire tread regu larly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible E Tire rotation B00054 Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly it is best to rotate the tires every 7 500 miles 12 500 km Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the right hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left hand side of the vehicle Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation After tire rota tion adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tight ened After driving approximately 600 miles 1 000 km check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose E Tire replacement The wheels and tires are important and in tegral parts of your vehicle s design they cannot be changed arbitrarily The tires fit ted as standard equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehi cle and were selected to give the best pos sible combination of running performance ride comfort and service life It is essential for every tire to have a size and construc tion matching those shown
220. h is turned to the ON position The following components are monitored by the indicator e Front sub sensor Right hand side e Front sub sensor Left hand side e Airbag control module including impact sensors e Frontal airbag module Driver s side e Frontal airbag module Front passen ger s side e Side airbag sensor Center pillar right hand side e Side airbag sensor Center pillar left hand side e Side airbag module Driver s side e Side airbag module Front passenger s side e Curtain airbag sensor Rear wheel house right hand side e Curtain airbag sensor Rear wheel house left hand side e Curtain airbag module Right side e Curtain airbag module Left side e Seatbelt pretensioner Driver s side e Seatbelt pretensioner Front passen ger s side e Seatbelt buckle switch Driver s side e Seatbelt buckle switch Front passen ger s side e Drivers seat position sensor e Front passenger s seatbelt tension sen sor e Front passenger s occupant detection system weight sensor e Front passenger s occupant detection control module e Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator e All related wiring If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre tensioners and or SRS airbag sys tem Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked Unless checked and properly rep
221. hange the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR to the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR function Then allow the belt to rewind into the retractor As the belt is rewinding clicks will be heard which indicate the re tractor functions as ALR nN 100505 8 Push and pull the child restraint system forward and from side to side to check if it is firmly secured Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seat belt 9 Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out ALR properly functioning 100506 10 To remove the child restraint system press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract com pletely The belt will return to the ELR mode AAWARNING NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER S SEAT DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor That function is restored by retracting the seatbelt fully V Installing forward facing child re straint 100507 1 Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear most position 2 Adjust the seatback to the upright posi tion 3 Place the child restraint system in the seating p
222. haust gas from entering the vehicle Never run the engine in a closed space such as a garage except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it Avoid remaining in a parked vehi cle for a lengthy time while the en gine is running If that is unavoid able then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly e If at any time you suspect that ex haust fumes are entering the vehi cle have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possi ble If you must drive under these conditions drive only with all win dows fully open Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle NOTE Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system you may hear a crackling sound coming from the ex haust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off This sound is normal Catalytic converter e Avoid fire hazards Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials e g grass paper rags or leaves because the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running The exhaust gas is very hot 800200
223. he seatbelts They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips not over the waist E Emergency Locking Retrac tor ELR The drivers seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor ELR The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor E Automatic Emergency Lock ing Retractor A ELR Each passenger s seatbelt has an Auto matic Emergency Locking Retractor A ELR The Automatic Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emer gency Locking Retractor ELR The A ELR has an additional locking mode Au tomatic Locking Retractor ALR mode in tended to secure a child restraint system When the seatbelt is once drawn out com pletely and is then retracted even slightly the retractor locks the seatbelt in that po sition and the seatbelt cannot be extend ed As the belt is rewinding clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor func tions as ALR When the seatbelt is retract ed fully ALR mode is released When securing a child restraint system on the passengers seats the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode When the child restraint system is re moved make sure that the retractor is re stored to the Emergency Locking Retrac tor E
224. he driver s driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal air bag s will basically not deploy 100538 The driver s and front passengers SRS frontal airbags are designed basically not to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind or if it rolls onto its side or roof or if it is involved in a low speed frontal collision 100539 1 First impact 2 Second impact In an accident where the vehicle is impact ed more than once the driver s and or front passenger s SRS frontal airbag s will deploy only once on the first impact Example In the case of a double collision first with another vehicle then against a concrete wall in immediate succession once either or both of the driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbags is are ac tivated on the first impact it they will not be activated on the second impact Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 59 E SRS side airbag and SRS cur tain airbag The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback which bears an SRS AIRBAG label In a moderate to severe side impact colli sion the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supple ments the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant s chest and waist The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the c
225. he lower level on the HOT range add the recom mended automatic transmission fluid up to the upper level V Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the automatic transmission check to see that the fluid level is between the lower level and upper level on the COLD range If it is below that range add fluid up to the upper level Be careful not to overfill Be careful not to spill automatic transmission fluid when adding it If automatic transmission fluid touch es the exhaust pipe it may cause a bad smell smoke and or a fire If au tomatic transmission fluid gets on the exhaust pipe be sure to wipe it off E Recommended fluid Use one of the following types of automat ic transmission fluid Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis sion Fluid Type HP IDEMITSU ATF HP Castrol Transmax J Pennzoil ATF J Available only in the USA except Alaska and Hawaii NOTE Using any non specified type of auto matic transmission fluid could result in damage inside the transmission When replacing the automatic transmission fluid be sure to use a fluid of the types specified above Front differential gear oil E Checking the oil level B00317 1 Yellow handle 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine 2 Pull out the dipstick wipe it clean and insert it again B00318 1 Upper
226. he seat or on the side of the seat e Next turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self checking Follow ing the system check both indicators ex tinguish for 2 seconds Now the ON indi cator should illuminate while the OFF indi cator remains extinguished If the OFF indicator still illuminates while the ON indicator remains extinguished ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection V Effect vehicle modifications made for persons with disabilities may have on Subaru advanced frontal airbag system operation U S only Changing or moving any parts of the front seats seatbelts front bumper front side frame instrument panel combination meter steering wheel steering column tire suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the Subaru advanced air bag system If you have any questions you may contact the following Subaru dis tributors lt Continental U S Alaska and the District of Columbia gt Subaru of America Inc Customer Dealer Services Department P O Box 6000 Cherry Hill NJ 08034 6000 1 800 SUBARU3 1 800 782 2783 lt Hawaii gt Schuman Carriage Motors Inc 1234 South Beretania Street Honolulu HI 96814 808 592 4497 lt Guam gt Triple J Enterprises Inc P O Box 6066 Tamuning Guam 96931 671 646 9126 lt Puerto Rico gt Trebol Subaru of Puerto Rico
227. he warning light while driving E System servicing e When discarding a seatbelt retrac tor assembly or scrapping the en tire vehicle damaged by a colli sion consult your SUBARU deal er e Tampering with or disconnecting the system s wiring could result in accidental activation of the seat belt pretensioner and or airbag or could make the system inopera tive which may result in serious injury The wiring harnesses of the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems are covered with yellow insulation and the connec tors of the system are yellow for easy identification Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pre tensioner and airbag systems For required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner see your nearest SUBARU dealer The front sub sensors are located in both front fenders and the airbag control module including the impact sensors is located under the center console If you need service or re pair in those areas or near the front seatbelt retractors we recommend that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform the work Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 29 NOTE If the front part of the vehicle is dam aged in an accident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not op erate contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible E Precautions against vehicle modification Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any
228. her nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time Otherwise if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside tem perature it may freeze and block the noz zles Adjust the washer fluid concentra tion appropriately for the outside temperature If the concentration is inappropriate sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank Replacement of wiper blades Grease wax insects or other materials on the windshield or the wiper blade re sults in jerky wiper operation and streak ing on the glass If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window and the wiper blades us ing a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water e Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent such as paint thinner or benzene This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades When you wish to raise the pas senger side wiper arm first raise the driver side wiper arm Other wise the passenger side wiper assembly and driver side wiper assembly will touch each other possibly resulting in scratches
229. hicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 33 e Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle Unsecured child restraint sys tems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop turn or accident they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child When you install a child restraint system follow the manufacturer s instructions supplied with it After installing the child restraint system check to ensure that it is held se curely in position If it is not held tight and secure the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in creased CONTINUED 1 34 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags V Installing a rearward facing child re straint 100503 1 Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear most position 2 Adjust the seatback to the upright posi tion 3 Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position 4 Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system follow ing the instructions provided by its manu facturer 5 Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click 100504 6 Take up the slack in the lap belt 7 Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re tractor to c
230. hion In this seating position you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt D Third row seat 7 seater models Installing a child restraint system is not recommended although the A ELR seat belt and two upper anchorages tether an chorages are provided in these positions These seating positions are not equipped with lower anchorages bars for installing LATCH system type child restraints How ever child restraint devices can be used in these position using the A ELR seat belts and upper anchorages tether an chorages provided Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projec tion of the seat cushion In this seating position you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained Because chil dren are lighter and weaker than adults their risk of being injured from deployment is greater Consequently be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint device
231. his condition is normal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning sys tem E Air conditioner compressor shut off when engine is heavily loaded To improve acceleration and gas mileage the air conditioner compressor is de signed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accel erator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade E Refrigerant for your climate control system Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a Therefore the method of adding changing or checking the refrigerant is different from the method for CFC12 freon Consult your SUBARU dealer for service Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty Air filtration system Replace the filter element according to the replacement schedule shown in the fol lowing This schedule should be followed to maintain the filter s dust collection abili ty Under extremely dusty conditions the filter should be replaced more frequently Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer For replacement we recommend the use of a genuine SUBARU air filter kit Replacement schedule Every 15 months or 15 000 miles 24 000 km whichever comes first E Replacing the air filter 400561 1 Remove the instrument panel side cov er NOTE The instrument panel side cover is held in pl
232. horter than the blink of an eye The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air bag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied When the SRS side airbag and SRS cur tain airbag deploy a sudden fairly loud in flation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released These occurrenc es are a normal result of the deployment This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment Doing so can cause burns because the compo nents can be very hot as a result of deployment After deployment do not touch any part of the SRS curtain airbag sys tem from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air bag are designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to se vere side impact collision It is basically Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 63 not designed to deploy in a lesser side im pact Also it is basically not designed to deploy in frontal or rear impacts because SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment would not help the occupant in those situations Each SRS side airbag and SRS cu
233. hould move slight ly down to the floor 3 With the brake pedal depressed stop the engine and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds The pedal height should not change 4 Start the engine again and run for ap proximately one minute then turn it off Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster The brake boost er operates properly if the pedal stroke de creases with each depression Check the brake pedal free play and re serve distance according to the mainte nance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet E Checking the brake pedal free play B00323 1 0 02 0 08 in 0 5 2 0 mm Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times Lightly pull the brake pedal up with one finger to check the free play with a force of less than 2 Ibs 10 N 1 kg If the free play is not within proper specifi cation contact your SUBARU dealer Maintenance and service 1 1 21 E Checking the brake pedal re serve distance B00324 1 More than 2 16 in 55 mm Depress the pedal with a force of approxi mately 66 Ibs 294 N 30 kg and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor When the measurement is smaller than the specification or when the pedal does not operate smoothly contact with your SUBARU dealer 1 1 22 Maintenance and service Replacement of brake pad and lining If you continue to d
234. icator in the ta chometer come on The gear position indi cator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st to 5th gear range The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gear shift is possible When the upshift indica tor A is on upshifting is possible When the downshift indicator is on downshifting is possible When both indi cators are on upshifting and downshifting are both possible When the vehicle stops for example at traffic signals the down shift indicator goes off CONTINUED 7 12 Starting and operating Gearshifts can be performed using the se lector lever 700309 Shift to the next higher gear by briefly pushing the selector lever toward the end of the manual gate Shift to the next lower gear by briefly pull ing the selector lever toward the end of the manual gate NOTE Please read the following points care fully and bear them in mind when using the manual mode e When the temperature of the engine oil is higher than normal warning beeps are emitted and the shift posi tion indicator shows If these warn ings are issued deselect the manual mode to protect the engine from dam age e The transmission does not automati cally shift up in the manual mode Per form gearshifts in accordance with road conditions so that the tachometer needle does not enter the red zone If the engine speed reaches a predeter mined level a fu
235. icle s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over e f you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud depress the accelera tor pedal slightly and move the selector le ver back and forth between D and R re peatedly Do not race the engine For the best possible traction avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle e When the road surface is extremely slippery you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than st e Never equip your vehicle with tires larg er than those specified in this manual e Wash the vehicle s underbody after off road driving Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup so they need to be washed thoroughly e Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle un der hard driving conditions such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of engine oil brake fluid and transmission oil than that speci fied in the maintenance schedule de scribed in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage Driving tips 8 7 Winter driving E Operation during cold weath er Carry some emergency equipment such as tire chains a window scraper a bag of sand flares a small shovel and jumper cables Ch
236. icle inspected at your SUBARU dealer NOTE The front passenger s SRS side airbag SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt preten sioner are not controlled by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system V Passenger s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators PASS AIR BAG i ON Di D e DN A2 a2 100533 ON Kb Z s SEF ON indicator Front passenger s frontal airbag OFF indicator Front passenger s frontal airbag A The front passenger s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag The indicators are located in the center portion of the instrument panel When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position both the ON and OFF indi cators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked Follow ing the system check both indicators ex tinguish for 2 seconds After that one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the Subaru advanced frontal airbag system monitor ing If the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag is activated the passenger s frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain extinguished If the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag is deactivated the passenger s frontal air bag ON indicator will remain extinguished while the OFF indicator will illuminate With the ignition
237. id level gauge page 11 15 5 Brake fluid reservoir page 11 20 6 Fuse box page 11 36 7 Battery page 11 35 8 Windshield washer tank page 11 30 Radiator cap page 11 11 10 Engine oil filler cap page 11 7 11 Engine coolant reservoir page 11 11 12 Engine oil level gauge page 11 7 TO K B00302 Engine oil E Checking the oil level Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine 2 Pull out the dipstick wipe it clean and insert it again 3 Be sure the dipstick is correctly insert ed until it stops with the graphic symbol D 7 on its top appearing as shown in the illustration B00304 1 Upper level 2 Lower level 4 Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it If it is below the lower level add oil to bring the level up to the up per level e Use only engine oil with the rec ommended grade and viscosity e Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it If oil touches the exhaust pipe it may cause a bad smell smoke and or a fire If en gine oil gets on the exhaust pipe be sure to wipe it off Maintenance and service 1 1 7 If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level To prevent overfilling
238. ier s handle Never re strain pets or pet carriers in the front pas sengers seat For further information consult your veterinarian local animal protection society or pet shop E Tire pressures Driving at high speeds with exces sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot A sharp in crease in temperature could cause tread separation and destruction of the tires The resulting loss of vehi cle control could lead to an acci dent Check and if necessary adjust the pres CONTINUED 8 sure of each tire including the spare at least once a month and before any long journey Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard Refer to the Tires and wheels section in chapter 11 for detailed information E California proposition 65 warning Engine exhaust some of its constit uents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids in vehicles and certain components of product wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can cer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm E On pavement and off road driving This vehicle is classified as a utility vehi cle Utility vehicles have a sig
239. ies with Part 15 of the Federal Com munication Commission Rules in the U S and the RSS 210 of Industry Canada in Canada Its operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must ac cept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration Changes and modifications to this system by anyone other than an authorized ser vice facility could void authorization to use this equipment HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Con trols Inc e When programming the HomeLink Wireless Control Sys tem you may be operating a ga rage door opener or other device Make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage door opener or other device to prevent potential harm or dam age Do not use the HomeLink Wire less Control System with any ga rage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards A garage door opener which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and re verse does not meet these safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases risk of serious injury or death For more information con sult the HomeLink website at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 When programming the HomeLink Wireless Control System to operate a garage door opener or a
240. ination stops working when you shut the driver s door or au tomatically after 30 seconds E Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed E Odometer 300261 This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ACC or ON position The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven If you press the trip knob when the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC position the odometer trip meter will light up If you do not press the trip knob within 10 sec onds of illumination of the odometer trip meter the odometer trip meter will go off The odometer trip meter will also go off if you open and close the driver s door with in 10 seconds of illumination of the odom eter trip meter E Double trip meter D IC 2 II l mm IDDn OU DUDU LIT D bet oon OU DUDU 300258 This meter display two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ACC or ON position The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero To change the mode indication briefly push the knob Each press of the knob changes the mode indication alternately A trip meter B trip meter To set the trip meter to zero select the A trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds If you press the trip k
241. ince your vehicle is equipped with a rear wiper automatic car wash brushes could become tan gled around it damaging the wip er arm and other components Ask the automatic car wash oper ator not to let the brushes touch the wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm on the rear window glass with adhesive tape before operating the machine NOTE When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash make sure be forehand that the car wash is of suit able type The best way to preserve your vehicle s beauty is frequent washing Wash the ve hicle at least once a month to avoid con tamination by road grime Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight Salt chemicals insects tar soot tree sap and bird droppings should be washed off by using a light detergent as required If you use a light detergent make certain that it is a neutral detergent Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth V Washing the underbody Chemicals salts and gravel used for deic ing road surfaces are extremely corrosive accelerating the corrosion of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cable
242. ing 100531 Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dashboard If the SRS frontal airbag deploys those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be pro pelled inside the vehicle and cause injury Do not attach accessories to the windshield or fit an extra wide mir ror over the rear view mirror If the SRS airbag deploys those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants V Drivers SRS frontal airbag The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact backward forward adjustment of the driver s seat position and whether or not he she is wearing the seatbelt The backward forward adjustment of the driver s seat position is monitored by the drivers seat position sensor under the driver s seat Whether or not the driver is wearing the seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt buck le switch Observe the following precautions Failure to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle switch and or the seat position sensor to malfunction preventing the Subaru ad vanced frontal airbag system from func tioning correctly or causing the system to fail e Do not place articles metal objects or in stall any accessory other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the drivers seat Do not allow the rear seat occupant to kick the driver s seat or p
243. ing a wheel nut wrench After towing remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper e Do not use the towing hook ex cept when towing your vehicle e Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehi cle could interfere with proper op eration of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision Rear towing hook 1 Take out the towing hook screwdriver and wheel nut wrench from the on board tool bag SS SE 900221 2 Pry off the cover on the rear bumper using a screwdriver and you will find a threaded hole for attaching the towing hook 900222 3 Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until its thread can no longer be seen 900223 4 Tighten the towing hook securely using a wheel nut wrench After towing remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag Put the thread hole cover on the rear bumper e Do not use the towing hook ex cept when towing your vehicle e Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehi cle could interfere with proper op eration of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision Front tie down hooks The front tie down hooks are located be tween each of the front tires and the front bumper Rear tie down hooks 900225 The rea
244. io will seek the next receivable station and stop on it That station s frequency will be shown on the audio display V With CD mode selected Press the a button to skip forward in the track file track order Pressing the v button the first time makes the play er go back to the beginning of the current track file track pressing it the second time makes it go back to the previous track file track The track file track number will be shown on the audio display YV Volume control buttons 500211 Press the button to increase the vol ume Press the button to reduce the volume A number indicating the volume will be shown on the audio display SZ MUTE button 500212 Press this button if you wish to immediate ly cut the volume to zero The audio display will show MUTE If you press the button again the original sound volume will return and MUTE goes off NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a navi gation system the display will show Audio 5 23 Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc Use only compact discs CDs CD Rs and CD RWs that have the mark shown in the following illustration Also some compact discs cannot be played CONTINUED 5 24 Audio EI DIGITAL AUDIO VIER Becordable WIER ReWritable 500090 DualDisc 500253 e You cannot use a DualDisc in the
245. ion Automatic climate control system NOTE e Operate the automatic climate con trol system when the engine is run ning e The blower fan rotates at a low speed when the engine coolant temperature is low For efficient defogging or dehumidify ing in cold weather press the A C button e Even when cooling is not necessary setting the temperature much lower than the current outlet air temperature turns on the air conditioner compres sor automatically and the A C indica tor light on the control panel comes on e Seven seater models each have a rear air conditioner The fan speed of the rear air conditioner can be adjust ed but other adjustments outlet air temperature air distribution etc are not possible for the rear air condition er For details refer to Rear air condi tioner if equipped in this section The automatic climate control system au tomatically controls outlet air temperature fan speed air flow distribution air inlet control and air conditioner compressor operation It activates when the AUTO button is pressed and is used to maintain a constant comfortable climate within the passenger compartment The temperature can be set within a range of 65 to 85 F 18 to 32 C E Control panel 1 Temperature control dial driver s side 2 Defroster button 3 Fan speed control dial 4 Rear window defogger button Refer to the
246. ion Control system except under above mentioned situations NOTE e When the switch has been pressed to deactivate the Traction Control sys tem the Traction Control system auto matically reactivates itself the next time the ignition key is turned to the OFF position and the engine is restart ed e If the switch is held down for 10 sec onds or longer the indicator light goes off the Traction Control system is acti vated and the system ignores any fur ther pressing of the switch To make the switch usable again turn the igni tion key to the OFF position and restart the engine e When the switch is pressed to deac tivate the Traction Control system the vehicle s running performance is com Starting and operating 7 23 parable with that of a vehicle that does not have a Traction Control system Do not deactivate the Traction Control system except when absolutely neces sary 7 24 Starting and operating Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS The tire pressure monitoring system pro vides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph 32 km h Also this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure for exam ple a blow out caused by running over a sharp object 700318 If th
247. ip knob for at least two seconds G on Activated Gott Deactivated With the function deactivated the combi nation meter illuminates as follows 1 Warning lights indicator lights meter rims meter needles odometer trip meter and gauge back lights illuminate 2 Meter and gauge dials illuminate 3 Regular illumination for driving be gins 300543 Briefly press the trip knob again You can now establish the activated deactivated setting for sequential illumination of the combination meter when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position To change the current setting press the trip knob for at least two seconds l on Activated Loft Deactivated Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip meter indication If you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position turn the ignition switch to the ON position or open and close the driver s door during the setting procedure the new setting will be canceled Also if you do not press the trip knob for a period of 10 seconds the new setting will be canceled NOTE e itis not possible to cancel sequential illumination of the combination meter while sequential illumination is actual ly taking place Cancel sequential illu mination when regular illumination for driving has begun e When you open the driver s door with the ignition switch in the LOCK position the meters needles and rims are lit The illum
248. ips for heater and air conditioner E Cleaning ventilator grille 400518 Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow leaves or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is im paired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser E Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight After parking in direct sunlight drive with the windows open for a few minutes to al low outside air to circulate into the heated interior This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air con ditioner for maximum cooling efficiency E Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed at idle or low driving speeds a few minutes each month during the off season to circulate its oil E Checking air conditioning system before summer sea son Check the air conditioner unit for refriger ant leaks hose conditions and proper op eration each spring Have your SUBARU dealer perform this check E Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low tem perature weather condition Under certain weather conditions high relative humidity low temperatures etc a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed T
249. irbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously depending on the severity of impact backward for ward adjustment of the driver s seat posi tion and fastening unfastening of the seat belt in the case of the driver s SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the total load on the seat in the case of the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag After deployment the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the driver s vision is not obstructed The time required from detecting impact to the de flation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye Both when only the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys and the driver s and front passenger s SRS frontal airbags deploy the driver s and front passenger s seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non accident situation should it occur the SRS airbag will deflate quickly not obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver s abil ity to maintain control of the vehicle When the SRS airbag deploys a sudden fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released These oc currences are a normal result of the de ployment This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment Doing
250. ire 32 psi 220 kPa 2 2 kgf cm2
251. ire quality grading standards This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear traction and temperature resistance This is to aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall be tween tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem perature A The quality grades apply to new pneu matic tires for use on passenger Cars However they do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less or to some limited pro duction tires All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades E Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative perfor mance of tires depends upon the ac tual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving hab its service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate E Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and
252. isc random playback playback Lo ga If you accidentally press the button and cancel the random mode press it again to reselect the random mode e Random playback will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps e Press the RPT button e Press the SCAN button e Press the A button e Select the radio mode e Press the RSE AUX button e Press the v or a side of the SEEK FLDR button e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position Vv Scan The scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds of each track file track on the disc folder in succession Press the SCAN button 7 to start scanning through all tracks upward beginning with the track file track following the currently selected one After all tracks files tracks on the disc folder has been scanned nor mal playback mode is restored Audio 5 11 To cancel a scan press the button again NOTE The scan mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the following opera tions e Press the RPT button e Press the RDM button e Press the A button e Press the a or vy side of the TUNE TRACK button e Press the a or vy side of the SEEK FLDR button MP3 disc e Select the radio mode e Press the RSE AUX button e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
253. ise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield blocking your view e Do not operate the washer contin uously for more than ten seconds 300513 The indicator light located on the combi nation meter will illuminate when the fog lights are on If the wipers stop during opera tion because of ice or some other or when the washer fluid tank is empty This may cause overheat ing of the washer motor Check the washer fluid level frequently such as at fuel stops Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window al ways use the windshield washer obstruction on the window the wiper motor could burn out even if the wiper switch is turned off If this occurs promptly stop the ve hicle in a safe place turn the igni tion switch to the LOCK posi tion and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper operation CONTINUED 3 30 Instruments and controls e Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable In ar eas where water freezes in winter use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent See Windshield washer fluid section in chapter 11 Also when driving the vehicle when there are freezing tempera tures use non freezing type wiper blades Do not clean the wiper blades with ga
254. ission testing The EPA has issued regulations for in specting the On Board Diagnostic OBD system as part of the state emissions in spection The OBD system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause vehicle emissions to ex ceed allowable limits These inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and light trucks Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented the OBD system inspection e The inspection of the OBD system con sists of a visual operational check of the CHECK ENGINE warning light malfunc tion indicator lamp MIL and an examina tion of the OBD system with an electronic scan tool while the engine is running e A vehicle passes the OBD system in spection if proper the CHECK ENGINE warning light MIL illumination is observed there is no stored diagnostic trouble codes and the OBD system readiness monitors are complete e A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the CHECK ENGINE warning light MIL is not properly operating or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in vehicle s computer with the CHECK EN GINE warning light MIL illuminated e A state emission inspection may reject not pass or fail a vehicle if the number of OBD system readiness monitors Not Ready is greater than one Under this condition the vehicle operator should be instructed to drive his her vehicle for a few days to set the monito
255. itch 3 32 Windshield wiper deicer ccccccessseeeeeseeeseees 3 32 Rear window defogger button Een 3 33 NIESEN 3 34 lnside Mirror recs vescscacecsvessscacccscahassvanciaveneastsesdeecsececs 3 34 Auto dimming mirror compass if equipped 3 34 Outside Mirrors eeh 3 36 Tilt steering wheel sasasssssssssusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 37 ao d BEE 3 37 Ignition switch e Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel prevent ing steering control And when the engine is turned off it takes a much greater effort than usual to steer Before leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others Children could operate the power windows the sunroof or other controls or even make the vehicle move The ignition switch has four positions LOCK ACC ON and START 300500 NOTE e Keep the ignition switch in the LOCK position when the engine is not running e Using electrical accessories for a long time with the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position can cause the battery to go dead If the ignition switch will not move from the LOCK position to the ACC po sition turn the steering wheel slightly t
256. k 1 6 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags Seat heater if equipped 100357 The seat heater operates when the igni tion switch is in the ON position The seat heater can be adjusted in three levels Press the button to activate the seat heater Each subsequent press of the button will reduce the level Pushing the button four times or keeping the button pressed for approximately 1 second will turn the heater off While the seat heater is operating its operating level is shown by the number of illuminated indicators To warm the seat as quickly as possible set the heater with three indicators illuminat ed When the vehicle s interior is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off e There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low tempera tures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time When us ing the heater always be sure to warn the persons concerned e Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat such as a blanket cushion or similar items This may cause the seat heater to overheat NOTE Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge Rear seats 5 seater models Second row seats 7 seater models 100358 Awarninc f e Seatbelts provide maximum re straint when the occupant sits well bac
257. k and upright in the seat Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions If you do so the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will in crease and both can result in se rious internal injury or death e Before adjusting the seat make sure the hands and feet of the rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism 7 seater models only Never adjust the seat while driving Doing so is dangerous as the seat could move rapidly and you could be injured 100094 Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident E Fore and aft adjustment Vv 5 seater models 100359 Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position Then release the le ver and move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked into place Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 7 Vv 7 seater models 100359 Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position When the right seat or the left seat pair is slid rearward it stops partway at the lock CONTINUED 1 8 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags point so as not to trap the legs of passen gers sitting on the third row seat It is possible to slide the seat or seat pair further r
258. king and sober up com pletely before getting behind the wheel E Drugs and driving There are some drugs over the counter and prescription that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception judgment and at tentiveness If you drive after taking them it may increase your your passengers and other persons risk of being involved in a serious or fa tal accident If you are taking any drugs check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the liter ature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability Do not drive af ter taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs please consult with your doctor Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind altering drugs For your own health and well being we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs E Driving when tired or sleepy When you are tired or sleepy your reaction will be delayed and your perception judgment and attentive ness will be impaired If you drive when tired or sleepy your your pas sengers and other persons chanc es of being involved in a serious ac cident may increase Please do not continue to drive but in stead find a safe place to rest if yo
259. king brake If both warning lights go out the EBD system may be faulty Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected 4 H both warning lights come on again and stay illuminated after the engine has been restarted shut down the engine again apply the parking brake and check the brake fluid level 5 If the brake fluid level is not below the MIN mark the EBD system may be faulty Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system in spected 6 If the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark DO NOT drive the vehicle In stead have the vehicle towed to the near est SUBARU dealer for repair e Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous This indicates your brake system may not be working properly If the light remains on have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly do not drive the vehicle Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair Starting and operating 7 19 Vehicle Dynamics Control system Always use the utmost care in driv ing overconfidence because you are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped vehicle could easily lead to a serious acci dent e Even if your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control winter tires or snow chains should be used when driving on snow covered or icy roads
260. king brake firmly and put the selector lever in the P Park position Always set the parking brake firmly when parking your vehicle Never rely on the transmis sion alone to hold the vehicle 700320 When parking on a hill always turn the steering wheel When the vehicle is head ed up the hill the front wheels should be turned away from the curb 700321 When facing downhill the front wheels should be turned into the curb Cruise control Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 25 mph 40 km h or more Make sure the main switch is turned OFF when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unin tentionally setting the cruise control NOTE If you move the cruise control lever or press the main switch button while turning the ignition switch ON the cruise control function is deactivated and the CRUISE indicator light flash es To reactivate the cruise control function turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK position and then turn it again to the ON position Do not use the cruise control under any of the following conditions This may cause
261. king with the SPORT mode selected the transmis sion may downshift to 4th or 3rd gear de pending on how hard you depress the brake pedal causing engine braking to work Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to upshift normal ly NOTE e A 5th to 4th automatic downshift will not occur at speeds above 78 mph 126 km h and a 4th to 3rd automatic down shift will not occur at speeds above 53 mph 86 km h e Automatic downshifts to 4th or 3rd may occur even when driving on a level road depending on conditions such as how hard you depress the brake pedal E Selector lever reverse inhibit ing function This function prevents accidental move ment of the selector lever to the R posi tion while the vehicle is moving The function becomes operational when the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi mately 6 mph 10 km h Once operation al it prevents the selector lever from being moved from the N position to the R po sition When the vehicle speed drops be low 6 mph 10 km h the function is can celed The selector lever can then be moved to the R and P positions When the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position movement of the se lector lever from the N position to the R position is possible for a limited time peri od and then becomes impossible Also the selector lever cannot be moved to the R position when it has been placed
262. kwise Bass control 6 to 6 For more bass sound Midrange control 6 to 6 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound Treble control 6 to 6 For less treble sound For more treble sound Fader control R9 to F9 To increase rear speaker volume To increase front speaker volume and decrease front speaker vol and decrease rear speaker vol ume ume Balance control L9 to R9 To increase left speaker volume Toincrease right speaker volume and decrease right speaker vol and decrease left speaker vol ume ume Vv FM AM selection button Push the FM 2 or AM 1 button when the radio is off to turn on the radio For more volume Push the FM or AM button when the radio is on to select FM1 FM2 or AM reception Audio 5 15 V Stereo indicator The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is received V Tuning V Manual tuning Press the side of the TUNE TRACK button 4 to increase the tuning frequency and press the tuning button marked y to decrease it Each time the button is pressed the fre quency interval can be changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0 2 MHz in the FM mode If you hold down the a side of the but ton the tuning frequency will increase continuously and if you hold down the v side of the button the tuning fre quency will decrease continuously Re lease the button when your desired
263. l consumption corresponding to that trip meter indica tion is not shown until the vehicle has subsequently covered a distance of 1 mile or 1 km E Driving range on remaining fuel RANGE sams WM ee Lt bf MILES 300558 U S spec vehicles RANGE sams WM Wm l L km 300559 Canada spec vehicles The driving range indicates the distance that can be driven taking into account the amount of fuel remaining in the tank and the average rate of fuel consumption When the low fuel warning light comes on the driving range indication flashes for five seconds The display first switches to the driving range indication if it was originally giving some other indication RANGE sams WM MILES 300560 U S spec vehicles RANGE sams WM km 300561 Canada spec vehicles If the driving range is shown as ___ there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank You must refuel the vehicle immedi ately NOTE e The driving range on remaining fuel is only a guide The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on remaining fuel so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light comes on e When the low fuel warning light is lit the display automatically shows TL even if the currently selected indication is not for the driving range on remaining fuel E Journey time 300562 The journey time shows the time that ha
264. ld get loose and create a traffic safety hazard For safety always connect the towing ve hicle and trailer with trailer safety chains Pass the chains crossing each other un der the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into ac count however be careful not to let them drag on the ground For more information about the safety chain connection refer to the instructions for your hitch and trailer V Side mirrors E BE p EE a _ Ke AN a 800018 After hitching a trailer to your vehicle check that the standard side mirrors pro vide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle s standard side mirrors use towing mirrors that con form with Federal state province and or other applicable regulations V Trailer lights Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicle s electrical system and cause a malfunction of your vehicle s lighting system Connection of trailer lights to your vehi cle s electrical system requires modifica tions to the vehicle s lighting circuit to in crease its capacity and accommodate wir ing changes To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly please consult your SUBARU dealer Check for prope
265. le 900264 7 seater models 900240 5 seater models The jack and jack handle is stored under CONTINUED 9 20 In case of emergency the cargo area For how to use the jack refer to the Flat tires section in this chapter Appearance care tee 10 2 Washing EE 10 2 Waxing and polishing cccceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 3 Cleaning aluminum wheels ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 3 Corrosion protection REENEN 10 3 Most common causes of corrosion en 10 3 To help prevent corrosion cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 4 Cleaning the interior REENEN 10 4 Seat fabri eeneg 10 4 Leather seat materials ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 4 Synthetic leather upholstery ccccceceeeeeeeeees 10 5 Climate control panel audio panel instrument panel console panel switches combination meter and other plastic surfaces een 10 5 10 2 Appearance care Exterior care E Washing e When washing the vehicle the brakes may get wet As a result the brake stopping distance will be longer To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do not wash the engine compart ment and areas adjacent to it If water enters the engine air intake electrical parts or the power steer ing fluid reservoir it will cause en gine trouble or faulty power steer ing respectively S
266. len fabrics may be used to remove dif ficult dirt spots rubbing with a soft dry cloth afterwards to restore the luster If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sunlight it is recommended that the seats and headrests be covered or the windows shaded to prevent fading or shrinkage Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treated with a commercial leather spray lacquer You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft folds or wrinkles which is characteristic of gen uine leather E Synthetic leather upholstery The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and water after first vacuum ing or brushing away loose dirt Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe off with a clean damp cloth Commercial foam type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when nec essary NOTE Strong cleaning agents such as sol vents paint thinners window cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials E Climate control panel audio panel instrument panel con sole panel switches combi nation meter and other plas tic surfaces Use a soft damp cloth to clean the climate control panel audio equipment instru ment panel center console combination meter panel and switches NOTE Do not use organic solvents such as paint thinners or gasoline or strong cleaning agents
267. level 2 Lower level 3 Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it If it is below the lower level add oil to bring the level up to the up per level Be careful not to spill front differen tial gear oil when adding it If oil touches the exhaust pipe it may cause a bad smell smoke and or a fire If oil gets on the exhaust pipe be sure to wipe it off E Recommended grade and viscosity Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives Never use different brands together Oil grade API classification GL 5 C 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 F 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 H EN Ns 5 o 80W 75W 90 B00032 SAE viscosity No and applicable tem perature Maintenance and service 1 1 1 7 Rear differential gear oil E Checking the gear oil level Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential protector The differential pro tector provides protection to the rear dif ferential assembly during off road use Removal of the rear differential protector is not required when checking the oil level i ra ee ee 1 Filler plug 2 Drain plug CONTINUED 1 1 1 8 Maintenance and service B00320 1 Filler hole 2 Drain hole 3 Oil level Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level The oil level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole If the oil level
268. ll con tinue to flash once every three seconds in dicating that the system is in the valet mode To exit valet mode change the setting of your vehicle s alarm system for activation mode Refer to Activating and deactivat ing the alarm system in this section E Passive arming When passive arming mode has been programmed by the dealer arming of the system is automatically accomplished without using the remote transmitter Note that in this mode DOORS MUST BE MANUALLY LOCKED V To enter the passive mode If you wish to program the passive arming mode have it done by your SUBARU dealer YV Arming the system In passive mode the system will au tomatically activate the alarm but WILL NOT automatically lock the doors In order to lock the doors you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 below or with the key once they have been closed Failure to lock the doors manually will result in a higher security risk 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON po sition Keys and doors 2 17 200721 1 LOCK 2 ON 2 Turn the ignition switch from ON to LOCK position and remove the key from the ignition switch 3 Open the doors and get out of the vehi cle CONTINUED 2 18 Keys and doors 200704 4 Before closing the doors lock all doors with the inside door lock levers 5 Close the doors The system will auto matically arm after one minute In th
269. llow ing functions e Locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate without a key e Unlocking the rear gate without key e Sounding a panic alarm e Arming and disarming the alarm sys tem See the next section Alarm system for detailed information The operable distance of the keyless entry system is approximately 30 feet 10 meters However this distance will vary depending on environmental conditions The system s operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant broadcast station TV tower or remote controller of home electronic appliances The keyless entry system does not oper ate when the key is inserted in the ignition switch Unlock disarm button ke Lock arm button dm Rear gate unlock button d A Panic button 1 Front 2 Back E Locking the doors E Unlocking the doors Keys and doors 2 9 E Unlocking the rear gate 200899 Press the button to lock all doors and rear gate An electronic chirp will sound once and the turn signal lights will flash once If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed an electronic chirp will sound five times and the turn signal lights will flash five times to alert you that the doors or the rear gate are not properly closed When you close the door it will automati cally lock and then an electronic chirp will sound once a
270. make a sharp turn at high speed If you do take your SUBARU off road cer tain common sense precautions such as the following should be taken e Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts e Carry some emergency equipment such as a towing rope or chain a shovel wheel blocks first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio e Drive carefully Do not take unneces sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or over rough terrain e Slow down and employ extra caution at all times When driving off road you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes banked curves traffic signs and the like e Do not drive across steep slopes In stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes A vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep e Avoid sharp turning maneuvers espe cially at higher speeds e Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the out side of the rim e If driving through water such as when crossing shallow streams first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat Drive slowly and completely through the stream The water should be shallow enough that it does not reach the vehicle s undercar
271. monthly using a tire gauge After any change to tire pres sure s the tire pressure monitoring system will not re check tire infla tion pressures until the vehicle is first driven more than 20 mph 32 km h Be sure to install the speci fied size for the front and rear tires ABS U S If the warning light behaves as fol lows the ABS system may not work properly When the warning light is on the ABS function shuts down however the conventional brake system con tinues to operate normally e The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 8 mph 12 km h The warning light comes on dur ing driving If any of these conditions occur have the ABS system repaired at the E ABS warning light Canada The ABS warning light comes on when the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer CONTINUED 3 1 6 Instruments and controls The ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system warning light if the EBD system becomes faulty For further details of the EBD system fault warning refer to Brake system warning light NOTE If the warning light behavior is as de scribed in the following the ABS sys tem may be considered normal e The warning light comes
272. n D and R repeatedly Do not race the engine For the best possible traction avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle When the road surface is extremely slip pery you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than st Refer to the Automatic transmission sec tion in chapter 7 for information on holding the transmission in 2nd position Driving tips 8 11 Loading your vehicle Never allow passengers to ride ona folded rear seatback or in the cargo area Doing so may result in serious injury 100094 e Never stack luggage or other car go higher than the top of the seat back because it could tumble for ward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or acci dent Keep luggage or cargo low as close to the floor as possible CONTINUED 8 12 Driving tips When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops sharp turns or in an accident Do not pile heavy loads on the roof These loads raise the vehi cle s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting for ward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop Never exceed the maximum load limit If you do some parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your
273. n The alarm system will give the following alarms when triggered e The vehicle s horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds e If any door or the rear gate remains open after the 30 second period the horn will continue to sound for a maximum of 3 minutes If the door or the rear gate is closed while the horn is sounding the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds The alarm is triggered by e Opening a door or the rear gate e Physical impact to the vehicle such as forced entry only vehicles with shock sen sors dealer option E Activating and deactivating the alarm system To change the setting of your vehicle s alarm system for activation or deactiva tion do the following 1 Disarm the alarm system see Disarm ing the system in this section 2 Sit in the drivers seat and shut all doors and the rear gate 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON po sition 4 Hold down the UNLOCK side of the drivers power door locking switch open the driver s door within the following 1 sec ond and wait 10 seconds without releas ing the switch The setting will then be changed as follows If the system was previously activated The odometer trip meter screen displays AL oF and the horn sounds twice indi cating that the system is now deactivated If the system was previously deactivated The odometer trip meter screen displays AL on and the
274. n a REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt whichever is appropriate for the child s age height and weight Always secure ALL types of child restraint devices including for ward facing child seats in one of the rear seating positions recom mended in this owner s manual According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi tions than in the front seating po sitions For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint sys tem see the Child restraint sys tems section in this chapter NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG Never allow a child to stand up or to kneel on the front passenger s seat or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms The SRS air bag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child When the SRS airbag deploys some smoke will be released This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trou ble If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys get fresh air promptly A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas NOTE When you sell your vehi
275. n an engine problem occurs and the malfunction indicator lamp turns on the indicator light will also come on The following two situations could indicate malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics Con trol system if either should occur have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of that system at the first avail able opportunity e The indicator light does not turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position e The indicator light fails to turn off after the engine is started even when several minutes have passed to allow the engine to heat up sufficiently E Traction Control system OFF switch erh 700114 Pressing the switch to deactivate the Traction Control system can facilitate the following operations e a standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy gravel covered or oth erwise slippery surface e extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow When the switch is pressed during engine operation the indicator light illuminates The Traction Control system will be deac tivated and the vehicle will behave like a model not equipped with the Traction Control system When the switch is pressed again to reactivate the Traction Control system the indicator light goes off With the Traction Control system deacti vated traction enhancement offered by Traction Control system is unavailable Therefore you should not deactivate the Tract
276. n entrance gate unplug the device s motor from the outlet during programming to prevent motor burnout NOTE e After programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System for the de sired devices retain the hand held transmitters for further programming or device testing in the event of a prob lem e It is recommended that you insert a new battery in the hand held transmit ter of a device to ensure correct pro gramming E Garage door opener pro gramming in the U S A NOTE When programming the HomeLink Wireless Control System for a garage door opener it is suggested that you park the vehicle outside the garage 1 Unplug the motor of the garage door opener from the outlet 600430 2 Press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Re lease both buttons NOTE If any of the HomeLink buttons are al ready programmed for other devices skip step 2 because it clears the mem ory of all the three buttons 3 Hold the end of the garage door open er s hand held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches 25 and 76 mm away from the HomeLink buttons on the driver s sun vi sor keeping the indicator light in view 600431 4 Using both hands simultaneously push the hand held transmitter button and the desired HomeLink button DO NOT release the buttons until step 5 has been completed 5 Hold down both buttons until the HomeLink
277. n of the button continuous opera tion is canceled and the rear window de fogger stops operating 15 minutes later e If the battery voltage drops below the permissible level after the rear window de fogger has following depression of the button operated for 15 minutes stopped operating for two minutes and started op erating again the rear window defogger immediately stops operating CONTINUED 3 34 Instruments and controls e Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra sives to clean the inner surface of the rear window They may dam age the conductors printed on the window To prevent the battery from being discharged do not operate the de fogger continuously for any long er than necessary NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with the out side mirror defogger the outside mir ror defogger operates while the rear window defogger is operating Mirrors Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving E Inside mirror 300516 The inside mirror has a day and night po sition Pull the tab at the bottom of the mir ror toward you for the night position Push it away for the day position The night po sition reduces glare from headlights E Auto dimming mirror com pass if equipped 300517 1 Left button 2 Auto dimming indicator 3 Photosensor 4 Right button The auto dimming mirror compa
278. n the tank has dropped to the lower limit If the warning light illumi nates refill the tank with fluid For the tank refilling method refer to the Windshield washer fluid section in chapter 11 CONTINUED 3 32 Instruments and controls E Rear window wiper and wash er switch 300290 GI Washer accompanied by wiper opera tion ON Continuous INT Intermittent OFF Park DN Washer accompanied by wiper opera tion Vv Rear wiper To turn the rear wiper on turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever upward to the INT or ON position To turn the wiper off return the knob on the end of the lever to the OFF position With the switch turned to the INT posi tion the rear wiper will operate intermit tently at intervals corresponding to the ve hicle speed longer when the vehicle speed is low shorter when the vehicle speed is high When you subsequently move the selec tor lever of the automatic transmission to the R position the rear wiper will switch to continuous operation When you move the selector lever from the R position to some other position the rear wiper will re turn to intermittent operation Vv Washer To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating turn the knob on the end of the wiper control lever upward to the position The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob To wash the rear window when the r
279. nce between the seat cushion and seatback a little wider to lo cate the two anchorages bars for the po sition where you want to install the child restraint system 100520 3 While following the instructions sup plied by the child restraint system manu facturer connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at marks on the bottom of the seatback When the hooks are connected make sure the adja cent seatbelts are not caught 100521 4 If your child restraint system is of a flexible attachment type which uses teth er belts to connect the child restraint sys tem properly to the lower anchorages While pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system firmly by taking up the slack in the belt 5 Connect the top tether hook to the teth er anchorage and firmly tighten the tether For information on how to set the top teth er read the following Top tether anchor ages 100522 6 Before seating a child in the child re straint system try to move seat back and forth and left and right to verify that it is held securely in position 7 To remove the child restraint system follow the reverse procedures of installa tion If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system ask your SUBARU dealer E Top tether anchorages Your vehicle is equipped with th
280. nd backing up V Driving with a trailer e You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when towing a trailer Avoid sudden braking because it may re sult in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control e Avoid uneven steering sharp turns and rapid lane changes e Slow down before turning Make a long er than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehi cle wheels to the inside of the turn In a tight turn the trailer could hit your vehicle e Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer caus ing sway Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses If swaying occurs firmly grip the steering wheel and slow down im mediately but gradually e When passing other vehicles consider able distance is required because of the added weight and length caused by at taching the trailer to your vehicle 800217 1 Left turn 2 Right turn e Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes practice When backing up with a trailer never accelerate or steer rapidly When turning back grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to the left for a left turn and turn it to the right for a right turn e If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed im mediately by the nearest SUBARU dealer V Driving on grades e Before g
281. nd service This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running prop erly Chapter 12 Specifications This chapter informs you about dimension and capacities of your SUBARU Chapter 13 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects This chapter informs you about Tire infor mation Uniform tire quality grading stan dards and Reporting safety defects Chapter 14 Index This is an alphabetical listing of all that s in this manual You can use it to quickly find something you want to read E Safety warnings You will find a number of WARNINGs CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual These safety warnings alert you to poten tial hazards that could result in injury to you or others Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual careful ly in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safe ly A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehi cle or both could result if the cau tion is ignored NOTE A NOTE gives information or sugges tions how to make better use of your vehicle E Safety symbol 000013 You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual This symbol means Do not Do not do this
282. nd the turn signal lights will flash once 200900 Press the g button to unlock the driv ers door An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice To unlock all doors and the rear gate briefly press the g button a second time within 5 seconds NOTE If the interval between the first and sec ond presses of the g button for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate is extremely short the sys tem may not respond 200901 Pressing the ep button opens the rear gate An electronic chirp will sound twice and the turn signal lights will flash twice E illuminated entry The interior map dome and cargo area light will illuminate when the g button is pressed This light stays illuminated for approximately 30 seconds if any of the doors or the rear gate is not opened If the button is pressed before 30 seconds have elapsed this light will go out To activate this function set the following interior light switches to the indicated po sitions CONTINUED 2 10 Keys and doors Map light OFF position Dome light Middle position Cargo area light DOOR position A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi nation period setting of the interior light in accordance with your preference Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details E Vehicle finder function Use this function to find your vehicle parked amo
283. nd well back in the seat 100350 Put children aged 12 and under ina rear seat properly restrained at all times The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children es pecially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained Because chil dren are lighter and weaker than adults their risk of being injured from deployment is greater Conse quently we strongly recommend that ALL children including those in child seats and those that have out grown child restraint devices sit in a REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt whichever is appropri ate for the child s age height and weight Always secure ALL types of child re straint devices including forward facing child seats in one of the rear seating positions recommended in this owner s manual Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 3 NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD To adjust the seat forward or backward WARNING FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT move the control switch forward or back SEAT DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS ward To prevent the passenger from slid INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD NOTE ing under the seatbelt in the event of BY PLACING THE CHILD S HEAD Durin a collision always put the seatback g backward forward adjustment s z d s TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG of the seat you cannot adjust the seat in the upright position while the
284. ndicator lights sec tion located in chapter 3 e Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank The addition of a cleaning agent may cause dam age to the fuel system Make sure that the cap is tight ened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an acci dent Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle Fuels may cause paint damage which is not covered under the SUBARU Limit ed Warranty Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap If you use the wrong cap it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank and emission control system might be damaged State emission testing U S only Testing of an All Wheel Drive vehi cle must NEVER be performed on a single two wheel dynamometer At tempting to do so will result in un controlled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby Resultant vehicle damage due to im proper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state in spection program or its contractors or licensees At state inspection time remember to tell your inspection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two wheel dyna mometer Otherwise serious transmis sion damage will result Some states have started using dyna mometers in their state inspection pro grams in order to meet their obligation un Starting
285. ng light S271 Oil pressure warning light AT OIL ATOL AT OIL temperature warning light Instruments and controls 3 9 ABS EX ABS warning light P Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light g Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light Traction Control system OFF indica tor light BRAKE Brake system warning light AWD AWD warning light Low tire pressure warning light SPORT SPORT mode indicator light ON ZC Front passenger s frontal airbag ON indicator light OFF Ai Front passenger s frontal airbag OFF indicator light m Low fuel warning light CRUISE Cruise control indicator light SET Cruise control set indicator light CONTINUED 3 1 0 Instruments and controls R DIFF i f TEMP Rear differential oil temperature warning light Windshield washer fluid warning light ss Door open warning light security Security indicator light If any lights fail to come on it indicates a burned out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair E Seatbelt warning light Ei and chime ES Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver s and front passenger s seat With the ignition switch turned to the ON position this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the following il lustrations
286. ng many vehicles in a large parking lot Provided you are within 30 feet 10 meters of the vehicle pressing the button three times in a five sec ond period will cause your vehicle s horn to sound once and its turn signal lights to flash three times NOTE If the interval between presses is too short when you press the Q button three times the system may not re spond to the signals from the remote transmitter E Sounding a panic alarm gt a a SR Q 200714 A PANIC button is located on the back of the transmitter To activate the alarm press the PANIC button once The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash To deactivate the panic alarm press any button on the remote transmitter Unless a button on the remote is pressed the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds E Selecting audible signal op eration Using an electronic chirp the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock If desired you may turn the audible signal off Do the following to deactivate the audible signal You can also use the same steps to restore the function 1 Sit in the drivers seat and shut all doors and the rear gate 2 Hold down the UNLOCK side of the power door locking switch 3 While holding down the UNLOCK side of the power door locking switch pull the key out and re insert it into the ignition switch at le
287. nge in weight distribution while driving Driving tips 8 21 Trailer hitches Never drill the frame or under body of your vehicle to install a commer cial trailer hitch If you do danger ous exhaust gas water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous or even lethal if inhaled Also drilling the frame or under body of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your ve hicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole e Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system brake system or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equipment e Do not use axle mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing wheels or tires wheel bearings Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer CONTINUED 8 22 Driving tips The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recommended A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer If use of a non genuine hitch is unavoid able be sure the hitch is suited to your ve hicle and trailer Consult with a profes sional hitch supplier to assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your ve hicle Be sure to follow all of the hitch man ufacturer s instructions for installation and use Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper The bumper is not designed to handle that t
288. ngs metal watchbands and other metal jewelry Never al low metal tools to contact the pos itive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehi cle because a short circuit will re sult Keep everyone including children away from the battery Charge the battery in a well venti lated area Battery posts terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer Wash hands after handling Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because it will shorten battery life It is unnecessary to periodically check the Maintenance and service 1 1 35 battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water 1 1 36 Maintenance and service Fuses Never replace a fuse with one hav ing a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result 0000000 0000000 B00334 The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment The fuses are located in two fuse boxes One is located under the instrument panel be hind the fuse box cover on the drivers seat side B00335 Open the lid that is located a
289. nificantly higher rollover rate than other types of ve hicles Designed not only for on pavement use but also for off road driving your B9 TRIBECA has a higher ground clearance and higher center of gravity making it more likely to roll over than ordinary pas senger cars It also handles and maneu vers differently from other passenger cars For this reason please read carefully the On pavement and off road driving sec tion in chapter 8 of this owner s manual and follow the instructions and precau tions in order to prevent serious injury or death due to loss of control rollover and other accidents Table of contents Keys and doors Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 2 ai Instruments and controls Climate control Interior equipment 7 Starting and operating Driving tips In case of emergency 9 Drvingtps CUE S xe D Di ka O D O S D KH 8 S 3 D S D S e D S Q 2 9 Specifications Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Index 10 Illustrated index 1 Engine hood lock release page 11 4 qo 2 Headlight switch page 3 26 P 3 Bulb replacement page 11 39 E Exterior 4 Wiper switch page 3 30 5 Moonroof page 2 23 6 Door locks page 2 4 7 Tire pressure page 11 25 8 Flat tires page 9 7 9 Tire chains page 8 11 10 Fog light switch page 3 28 11 Tie down hooks page 9 15 12
290. nk and then insert the key in the ignition switch and turn it to the START position and again try to start the engine NOTE The engine may not start in the follow ing cases 300502 e The key grip is touching another key or a metallic key holder 300503 e The key is near another key that con tains an immobilizer transponder E Key reminder chime The reminder chime sounds when the drivers door opens and the key is in the LOCK or ACC positions The chime stops when the key is removed from the ignition switch E ignition switch light For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark the ignition switch light comes on when any of the doors are opened The light remains on for a several seconds and gradually goes out after all doors are closed or if the key is inserted in the igni tion switch Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges 300504 The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions The hazard warning flasher works with the ignition switch in any position To turn on the hazard warning flasher push the hazard warning button on the in strument panel To turn off the flasher push the button again NOTE When the hazard warning flasher is on the turn signals do not work NOTE Liquid crystal displays are used in some of the meters and gauges in the combination met
291. nnnnnnsrereenenne 1 16 Engine Compartment overview cccccceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 11 6 GOORIN EE 11 11 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 8 2 FOO EE 11 4 Eeer nes ahaa ed 11 7 Overheating M 9 14 Starting Eeer 7 7 14 4 index DS LOPDING eener 7 8 EXLGNOP CALC EE 10 2 F Ee EE eege EE 9 7 Floor mat EE 6 11 Fluid level Automatic transmission ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 11 15 GIE 11 20 Power steering dude gee ge dE e 11 19 Front Differential gear RE 11 16 ew Blo 1 Sarees ee 11 42 Fog light SWIG EE 3 28 Seatbelt pretensioners sseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 27 SOS Ae dele et eege eegener 1 2 aC E EE 7 2 Economy dl 8 2 Fill r lid and Cap EE 7 3 CSA EE 3 8 Requirements EE 7 2 PUCIQAUGE EEN 3 8 UREE E EEA 11 36 Fuses and circuits EE EE 12 5 G GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating eee 8 13 Glove DOK EE 6 4 GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rang 8 13 H Hazard warning flasher 2 ssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 Head restraint adjustment Front eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Headlight E EE 3 26 Indicator NGI EE 3 20 wl el Te LEE 3 26 11 40 High beam indicator light eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 20 Home ETC EE 6 13 ORI EE 3 37 Hose and connections eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 11 l Ignition switch RE 3 3 IR 9 E 3 4 lllumin
292. nob when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position the odometer trip meter will light up It is pos sible to switch between the A trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odometer trip meter is lit up If you do not press the trip knob within 10 seconds of il lumination of the odometer trip meter the odometer trip meter will go off Also if you open and close the driver s door within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer trip meter the odometer trip meter will go off To ensure safety do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving as an accident could result Instruments and controls 3 7 NOTE If the connection between the combi nation meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle mainte nance or fuse replacement the data re corded on the trip meter will be lost Y Vehicle communication system fault indication The vehicle communication system car ries various types of information vehicle speed running conditions etc to control modules In the event of a fault in this communication system the trip meter will show OO If the trip meter shows OO immedi ately contact the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle communication sys tem inspected NOTE If you press the trip knob while the trip meter is showing CO the trip meter indication will appear for 10 sec onds E Tachometer The tachometer sh
293. ns Failure to do so may lessen the load on the front passenger s seat de activating the front passenger s SRS fron tal airbag despite the fact that the seat is occupied by an adult e Do not allow the rear seat occupant to lift the front passenger s seat cushion us ing his her feet e Do not place any article under the front passenger s seat or squeeze any article from behind and under the seat This may lift the seat cushion e Do not squeeze any article between the front passenger s seat and side trim pillar door or center console box This may lift the seat cushion V If the passenger s frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator extinguishes even when the front passenger s seat is occupied by an adult This can be caused by the adult incorrect ly sitting in the front passengers seat Turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi tion Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion correctly fasten the seatbelt position his her legs out forward and adjust the seat to the rearmost position Turn the ignition switch to the ON position If the OFF in dicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains extinguished take the following actions e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF po sition e Ensure that there is no article book shoe or other object trapped under the seat at the rear of t
294. ns It is recommended that you have your dealer program all of your transmit ters into your system Vv Programming the transmitters The keyless entry system is equipped with a special code learning feature that allows you to program new transmitter codes into the system or to delete old ones The sys tem can learn up to four unique transmitter codes The four transmitter codes may be the same or different Programming transmitter codes into system DO NOT DISPOSE THIS LABEL M ID NO 200718 Bag containing transmitter CONTINUED 2 12 Keys and doors 200719 Transmitter circuit board To register a new transmitter with the key less entry system it is necessary to pro gram the transmitter s code identification number into the system A label showing the code is affixed to the bag containing the transmitter and another is affixed to the circuit board inside the transmitter If there is no bag open the transmitter case and make a note of the eight digit number Program the number into the system in accordance with the following procedure 1 Firmly close the doors and the rear gate or trunk lid 2 Open the driver s door sit on the driv er s seat and close the door 3 Perform the following steps within 45 seconds 200720 1 Open and close the drivers door once 200721 1 LOCK 2 ON 2 Insert the key into the ignition switch then turn it fr
295. ns no MP3 files it is counted as a folder e Writing software can rearrange fold ers and files such that the playback or der is different from the desired one e The playback order for a given disc can be different with different players E Copyright issues Except with respect to copies made for personal use duplication distribution and transmission of music and other copy righted material on a disc without permis sion from the copyright holder is illegal Interior ight AeeeeeeeeeeeeeeEee Ree LEE Cargo area light ssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Map EE SS HEIEREN Sun visor extension plate AEN Vanity mirror with light ue Storage compartment ce eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees Glove ben eege deer deten cece dontdanduveescucbanudecuvudteed Center console box ENK KRKRKEN RRE KREE Rear console a a a a a Overhead console ccccececenecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens C p holdet rniii daaar iaaea Front passenger s cup holder 0 sssseee Rear seat 5 seater models Second row seat 7 seater models passenger s cup holder Third row seat cup holders 7 seater models Accessory power Outlets cceceeeseeeeeees Coat hOOkK zeegt Ace ae aes Rear 5 seater models Second row 7 seater models passenger area 0sseseeeeeees Shopping bag NOOK ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Floor IAL ee de EE Convenient tie down hooks cccsseeeeees
296. nsion com ponents Also wash the vehicle promptly after driving on any of the following surfac es e roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter e mud sand or gravel e coastal roads After the winter has ended it is recom mended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing Before the beginning of winter check the condition of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables suspension steering system floor pan and fenders If any of them are found to be rusted they should be given an appropriate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under the floor mats because that could cause corrosion Oc casionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry Keep your garage dry Do not park your vehicle in a damp poorly ventilated ga rage In such a garage corrosion can be caused by dampness If you wash the ve hicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage when wet or covered with snow that can cause dampness If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and or in areas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used the door hinges and locks trunk lid lock and hood latch should
297. o the desired speed 2 Push the control lever downward in the SET COAST direction once Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without de pressing the accelerator pedal NOTE If the difference between the actual ve hicle speed when the control lever is pushed downward and the speed last time you set is less than 4 mph 6 8 km h the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph 1 6 km h This occurs because the cruise control system unit regards this lever operation as that intended to decrease the vehicle speed V To decrease the speed by control lever CANCEL e A RES ACC GK Y SET COAST 300333 Push the control lever downward in the SET COAST direction and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed Then release the control lever The vehi cle speed at that moment will be memo rized and treated as the new set speed When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 4 mph 6 8 km h the set speed can be lowered 1 mph 1 6 km h each time by pressing the control lever downward in the SET COAST direction quickly within 0 25 second Starting and operating 7 29 V To decrease the speed by brake pedal 1 Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily 2 When the speed decreases to the de sired speed press the control lever down ward in the SET COAST di
298. o the left and right as you turn the ig nition switch e If the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large bunch of other keys cen trifugal force may act on it as the vehi cle moves resulting in unwanted turn ing of the ignition switch Also if a large keyholder is attached to the key Instruments and controls 3 3 your knees or hands may accidentally touch it in a way that turns the ignition switch E LOCK The key can only be inserted or removed in this position The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key If turning the key is difficult turn the steer ing wheel slightly to the right and left as you turn the key 300501 The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the selector lever is in the P position E ACC In this position the electrical accessories CONTINUED 3 4 Instruments and controls radio accessory power outlet etc can be used WON This is the normal operating position after the engine is started E START Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position while the engine is running The engine is started in this position The starter cranks the engine to start it When the key is released after the engine has started the key automatically returns to the ON position If your registered key fails to start the en gine pull out the key once the security in dicator light will bli
299. oad capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passen gers and their belongings any cargo any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch roof rack or bike carrier etc and the tongue load of a trailer Therefore cargo capacity can be cal culated by the following method Cargo capacity Load limit total weight of occupants total weight of optional equipment tongue load of a trailer if applicable For towing capacity information and weight limits refer to Trailer towing in chapter 8 v Calculating total and load capac ities varying seating configura tions Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following examples Example 1A D00101 Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 1 157 Ibs 525 kg which is indicat ed on the vehicle placard with the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 525 kg or 1 157 Ibs For example if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 Ibs 70 kg plus cargo weighing 1 212 Ibs 550 kg 1 Calculate the total weight Total weight 154 Ibs 70 kg 882 Ibs 400 kg Occupant Cargo 1 036 Ibs 470 kg 2 Calculate the available load capac ity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 800 Ibs 363 kg Available Load Capacity 1 157 Ibs 1 036 Ibs 525 kg 470 kg Vehicle Total weight capacity weight 121 Ibs 55 kg 3 The r
300. ocks section in chapter 2 Always lock the passenger s win dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child op erating the power window Refer to the Power windows section in chapter 2 Never leave unattended children in the vehicle They could acci dentally injure themselves or oth ers through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot or sun ny days temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them Carefully read the sections Child restraint systems SRS airbag Supplemental Restraint System airbag and Seatbelts in chapter 1 of this owner s manual for in structions and precautions concerning the child restraint system seatbelt system and SRS airbag system CONTINUED 6 E Engine exhaust gas carbon monoxide e Never inhale engine exhaust gas Engine exhaust gas contains car bon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous or even lethal if inhaled e Always properly maintain the en gine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle Never run the engine in a closed space such as a garage except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it Avoid remaining in a parked vehi cle for a lengthy time while the en gine is running If
301. of a receivable station is reached V Seek tuning If you press the a or y side of the SEEK FLDR button 6 the radio will auto matically search for a receivable station and stop at the first one it finds This func tion may not be available however when radio signals are weak In such a situation perform manual tuning to select the de sired station V Automatic tuning SCAN Press the SCAN button 7 to change the radio to the SCAN mode In this mode the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the frequency after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been scanned from the low end to the high end Press the SCAN button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any dis played frequency Press the a or v side of the SEEK FLDR 6 button again to cancel the scan mode and to stop on any displayed fre quency When the SCAN button is pressed for automatic tuning stations are scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high fre quencies only Automatic tuning may not function proper ly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and hills V Selecting preset stations Presetting a station with a preset button 9 allows you to select that station in a single operation Up to six AM FM1 and FM2 stations
302. oing down a steep hill slow down and shift into lower gear if neces sary use 1st gear in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent over heating of your vehicle s brakes Do not make sudden downshifts e When driving uphill in hot weather the air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating e When driving uphill in hot weather pay attention to the water temperature gauge pointer and AT OIL TEMP warning light since the engine and transmission are rel atively prone to overheating under these conditions If the water temperature gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi nates immediately switch off the air con ditioner and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place Refer to the Engine overheat ing section in chapter 9 and Warning and indicator lights section in chapter 3 NOTE The temperature of engine coolant is less likely to rise to the OVERHEAT zone in the D position than in the manual mode position e Avoid using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat Vv Parking on a grade Always block the wheels under both vehi cle and trailer when parking Apply the parking brake firmly You should not park on a hill or slope But if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided you should tak
303. om the LOCK position to the ON position 10 times within 15 seconds NOTE e When you complete step 2 an elec tronic tone will sound once a buzzer will continue to sound and the interior light will continue to flash until the transmitter codes are completely regis tered e If you do not perform steps 1 and 2 within 45 seconds an error will occur Neither an electronic tone nor the buzz er will sound and the interior lamp will not flash In this event perform the whole procedure again beginning with part 1 4 Open and close the door once within 15 seconds NOTE e When part 4 of the procedure is com pleted an electronic tone will sound for 30 seconds e If you do not perform the operations in part 4 within 15 seconds an error will occur and the electronic tone will not sound In this event perform the registration steps again beginning with part 3 of the procedure 200722 5 Before the electronic tone stops sound ing push the side of the power door locking switch the same number of times as the leftmost digit of the transmitter code For example push the locking switch eight times if the leftmost digit of the code is 8 NOTE e The electronic tone will stop sound ing when you start entering the num ber e If you do not start entering the num ber using the lock knob before the electronic tone stops sounding an er ror will occur In this event perform the registrati
304. ome unbalanced as the tires become worn during use Wheel imbalance caus es the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle s straight line stability It can also cause steering and suspension sys tem problems and abnormal tire wear If you suspect that the wheels are not cor rectly balanced have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer Also have them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation NOTE Loss of correct wheel alignment caus es the tires to wear on one side and re duces the vehicle s running stability Contact your SUBARU dealer if you no tice abnormal tire wear The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment relative to the other wheels and to the road for optimum straight line stability and cornering perfor mance Maintenance and service 1 1 27 E Wear indicators B00327 1 New tread 2 Worn tread 3 Tread wear indicator Each tire incorporates a tread wear indica tor which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0 071 in 1 8 mm A tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread CONTINUED 1 1 28 Maintenance and service When a tire s tread wear indicator becomes visible the tire is worn be yond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately With a tire in this condition driving at hig
305. on NOTE If a cell phone is placed near the radio it may cause the radio to emit noise when it receives calls This noise does not indicate a radio fault Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer be fore installing a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in your vehicle Such devices may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrect ly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle Audio set Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets See the pages indicated in this section for operating de tails E Type A audio set EE Te R ae Gi ae Di Le KR ROM BAL Ee A LO OS 500201 e Radio operation refer to page 5 4 e CD compact disc player operation re fer to page 5 8 E Type B audio set 500206 e Radio operation refer to page 5 13 e Built in CD changer operation refer to page 5 17 Audio 5 3 5 4 Audio Type A audio set if equipped The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position E Radio operation 500203 1 AM button 2 FM button 3 AUX RSE button 4 TUNE TRACK button 5 Power switch volume control dial 6 SEEK FLDR button 7 SCAN button 8 TONE BAL button 9 Preset button YV Power switch and volume control The dial 5 is used
306. on right af ter the engine is started but goes out immediately remaining off e The warning light remains on after the engine has been started but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 8 mph 12 km h e The warning light comes on during driving but it goes out immediately and remains off When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started the ABS warning light may come on This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction When the battery becomes fully charged the light will go out E Brake system warning light BRAKE U S Canada e Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous This indicates your brake system may not be working properly If the light remains on have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly do not drive the vehicle Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair This light has the following three func tions V Parking brake warning The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the ON position It goes out when the park ing brake is fully released V Brake fluid level warning This light comes on when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the MIN level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the ON posi
307. on steps again beginning with part 3 of the procedure e If the interval between one push of the knob and the next exceeds five sec onds an error will occur In this event perform the procedure again beginning with part 4 If an error occurs six times perform the procedure again starting with part 3 200723 6 When you have finished entering the number push the g side of the lock ing switch within five seconds NOTE e An electronic tone will sound e If you push the g side of the locking switch when more than five seconds have passed an error will oc cur In this event perform the proce dure again beginning with part 4 If an error occurs six times perform the pro cedure again starting with part 3 Keys and doors 2 13 7 Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure for each of the remaining digits of the transmitter code beginning with the sec ond digit counting from the left and fin ishing with the eighth digit NOTE e When you finish entering the eighth digit an electronic tone will sound for 30 seconds e If the interval between one push of the switch and the next exceeds five seconds an error will occur In this event perform the procedure again be ginning with part 4 If an error occurs six times perform the procedure again starting with part 3 8 Before the electronic tone stops sound ing use the power door locking switch to again enter the transmitter code
308. on the tire placard and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on the tire placard Using tires of a non specified size detracts from controllability ride comfort braking performance speedometer accuracy and odometer accuracy It also creates incor rect body to tire clearances and inappro priately changes the vehicle s ground clearance All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer brand tread pattern con struction and size You are advised to re place the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equip ment For safe vehicle operation SUBARU rec ommends replacing all four tires at the same time e All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer brand tread pattern construction de gree of wear speed symbol load index and size Mixing tires of dif ferent types sizes or degrees of wear can result in damage to the vehicle s power train Use of dif ferent types or sizes of tires can also dangerously reduce control lability and braking performance and can lead to an accident Use only radial tires Do not use radial tires together with belted bias tires and or bias ply tires Do ing so can dangerously reduce controllability resulting in an ac cident E Wheel replacement When replacing wheels due for example to damage make sure the replacement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard
309. orces involved CONTINUED 1 66 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags V Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag will basically not deploy 100541 1 The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle moving or station ary 2 The vehicle is struck from behind The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain air bag are basically not designed to deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision or is struck from behind Examples of such accidents are illustrated 100563 1 First impact 2 Second impact SRS curtain airbag B SRS side airbag In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only once on the first impact Example In the case of a double side im pact collision first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the same direction once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact they will not be activated on the second E SRS airbag system monitors EU 25 e Q 100385 A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system including front seatbelt pretensioners while the vehicle is being driven The SRS airbag system warning light AIRBAG will show normal system operation by lighting for approximately 6 seconds when the ig nition switc
310. osition 4 Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system follow ing the instructions provided by its manu facturer 5 Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 35 100508 6 Take up the slack in the lap belt 7 Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re tractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR to the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR function Then allow the belt to rewind into the retractor As the belt is rewinding clicks will be heard which indicate the re tractor functions as ALR CONTINUED 1 36 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 100509 8 Before having a child sit in the child re straint system move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured Sometimes a child restraint can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seat belt 9 Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out ALR properly functioning 100510 Rear seat 5 seater models Second row seat 7 seater models 100511 Third row seat 7 seater models 10 If the child restraint system requires a top tether latch the hook onto the top teth er anchor and tighten the top tether See the Top tether anchorages for additional instructions
311. ou fast reverse to the beginning of the first track file track fast reversing will stop and the player will start play back V Repeating V To repeat the currently playing track file track To repeat a track file track briefly press the RPT button 6 while the track file Audio 5 19 track is playing The display will show RPT and the track file track will be re peated To cancel the track file track repeat play mode briefly press the RPT button twice The RPT indication will go off and the normal playback mode will be re sumed NOTE e Each time you briefly press the but ton the mode will change to the next one in the following sequence RPT gt D RPT gt CANCEL If you accidentally press the button and cancel the track file track repeat play mode press it again to reselect the repeat play mode e The repeat play mode will be can celled if you perform any of the follow ing steps e Press the RDM button Press the SCAN button Press the A button Press the disc select button Select the radio mode Press the RSE AUX button Press the yv or a side of the SEEK FLDR button MP3 disc CONTINUED 5 20 Audio e Turn off the power of the audio equipment e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position V To repeat the currently playing disc folder To repeat the currently playing disc folder press the
312. ould result if the vehicle is towed with the en gine running The traveling speed must be limit ed to less than 20 mph 30 km h and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles 50 km For greater speeds and distances transport your vehicle on a flat bed truck 1 Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to bring it to the upper level if necessary 2 Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral 3 The ignition switch should be in the ACC position while the vehicle is being towed 4 Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle Rear gate if the rear gate cannot be unlocked In the event that you cannot unlock the rear gate by operating the power door locking switches or the remote keyless en try system you can unlock it from inside the cargo area 900228 1 Remove the access cover at the bot tom center of the rear gate trim using flat head screwdriver 2 Locate the rear gate lock release lever behind the rear gate trim panel CANO 900263 3 Unlock the rear gate by moving the le ver to the right 4 Open the rear gate from outside by raising the rear gate handle Maintenance tools 900230 Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools Screwdriver Towing hook eye bolt Wheel nut wrench Extension In case of emergency 9 19 E Jack and jack hand
313. oved to the manual gate the SPORT mode is select ed and the indicator light comes on Refer to the Automatic transmission section in chapter 7 V Automatic transmission control system warning If the light flashes after the engine starts it may indicate that the automatic trans mission control system is not working properly Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately CONTINUED 3 20 Instruments and controls E Selector lever Gear position indicator 300266 The selector lever gear position indicator shows the position of the selector lever When manual mode is selected the gear position indicator shows the current gear position and the upshift downshift indica tor illuminates Refer to the Automatic transmission section in chapter 7 WE Turn signal indicator e e lights These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly the turn signal bulb may be burned out Replace the bulb as soon as possible Refer to the Replacing bulbs section in chapter 11 E High beam indicator O light This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode This indicator light also comes on when the headlight flasher is operated E Cruise control indica tor light The cruise control indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after
314. ows To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment you must do the following e When operating the power win dows be extremely careful to pre vent anyone s fingers arms neck or head from being caught in the window Always lock the passengers win dows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power win dow The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position Keys and doors 2 19 V Driver s side switches 1 Lock switch 2 For drivers window 3 For front passenger s window 4 For rear left passenger s window 5 For rear right passenger s window All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster at the driver side door CONTINUED 2 20 Keys and doors V Operating the driver s window Ma D e 200728 2 Automatically open 1 Open To open Push the switch down lightly and hold it The window will open as long as the switch is held This switch also has a one touch auto down feature that allows the window to be opened fully without holding the switch Push the switch down until it clicks and re lease it and the window will fully open To stop the win
315. ows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute CONTINUED 3 8 Instruments and controls Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone In this range fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrev ving The engine will resume run ning normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone E Fuel gauge WF 300542 The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank The gauge may move slightly during brak ing turning or acceleration due to fuel lev el movement in the tank If you press the trip knob while the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC position the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank If while the fuel gauge is indicating the amount of fuel remaining in the tank you a do not press the trip knob for 10 sec onds or b open and close the drivers door the fuel gauge indication will go off H 200253 Vv Low fuel warning light The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty Approximately 2 6 US gal 10 liters 2 2 Imp gal It only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position NOTE This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an internal fuel quantity of approximately 4 0 US gal 15 liters 3 3 Imp gal E Temperature gauge 3005
316. ows through the instru ment panel outlets the foot outlets and some through the windshield defroster outlets Heat def Air flows through the instru ment panel outlets the windshield defrost er outlets and the foot outlets V Air inlet selection button 400515 ON position Recirculation Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle Push the air inlet selection button to the ON position for fast cooling with the air conditioner or when driving on a dusty road The indica tor light will come on OFF position Outside Air Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment Push the air inlet selection button to the OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature and the road is no longer dusty The indicator light will go off Continued operation in the ON posi tion may fog up the windows Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condition clears NOTE When driving on a dusty road or be hind a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust gases set the air inlet selec tion button to the ON position From time to time return the air inlet selection button to the OFF position to draw outside air into the passenger compartment E Rear air conditioner if equipped 400516 The rear air conditioner blows cool air out of the rear ventilators while the A C but ton on the control panel is in the ON po sition Th
317. ped air in the system Coolant capacity Guideline 7 8 US qt 7 4 liters 6 5 Imp qt e Be careful not to spill engine cool ant when adding it If coolant touches the exhaust pipe it may cause a bad smell smoke and or a fire If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe be sure to wipe it off Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface B00309 6 Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tank s FULL level mark B00018 7 Put the radiator cap back on and tight en firmly At this time make sure that the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is cor rectly in place 8 Start and run the engine for more than five minutes at 2 000 to 3 000 rpm 9 Stop the engine and wait until the cool ant cools down 122 to 140 F 50 to 60 C If there is any loss of coolant add coolant to the radiator s filler neck and to the reserve tank s FULL level 10 Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly Maintenance and service 1 1 1 3 Air cleaner element Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed The air cleaner element not only filters in take air but also stops flames if the engine backfires If the air cleaner element is not installed when the en gine backfires you could be burned The air cleaner element functions as a fil
318. pening or closing it momentarily push the switch to the OPEN or CLOSE side After washing the vehicle or after it rains wipe away water on the roof prior to open ing the moonroof to prevent drops of water from falling into the passenger compart ment E Anti entrapment function When the moonroof senses an object trapped between its glass and the vehi cle s roof during closure it automatically moves back to either of the following posi tions according to the point at which it senses the object e When the moonroof senses the object at a point between the halfway stop posi tion and fully closed position it moves back to the halfway stop position and stops there e When the moonroof senses the object at a point between the halfway stop posi tion and fully open position it moves back to the fully open position and stops there The anti entrapment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moon roof even when there is nothing trapped NOTE For the sake of safety it is recommend ed that you avoid driving with the Keys and doors 2 25 moonroof fully opened E Sun shades gt 200739 The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed If the moonroof is opened the sun shade also moves back Instruments and controls Ignition switch E 3 3 Rear differential oil temperature warning light 3 14 elei EE 3 3 Low tire pre
319. perating the vehicle make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment NOTE Remember that the vehicle s center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof thus affecting the driving characteristics Drive carefully Avoid rapid starts hard cornering and abrupt stops Crosswind effects will be increased V Removal and installation of the crossbars 800205 Each of the two roof molding has two mounting points for crossbars Each mounting point is fitted with a cover Use a screwdriver to remove the covers When installing the crossbars on the roof mold ing follow the manufacturer s instructions Trailer hitch if equipped 800256 1 Trailer hitch e Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal inju ries Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situa tion Refer to the next section Trailer towing for possible rec ommendations and limitations e Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailers maximum gross weight Towing trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage Be sure to check the hitch pin and safet
320. r Also it is strongly recom mended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be in stalled in one of the rear seating po sitions recommended in this own er s manual and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in a REAR seat This is because children sit ting in the front passenger s seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag deploy REAR seats are the safest place for children When the front passenger s seat is occu pied by a child observe the following pre cautions Failure to do so may increase the load on the front passenger s seat ac tivating the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by a child Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 53 e Do not place any article on the seat oth er than the child occupant and a child re straint system e Do not place more than one child on the seat e Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback e Do not store a heavy load in the seat back pocket e Do not allow the rear second row seat occupant to place his her hands or legs on the front passenger s seatback or allow him her to pull the seatback V If the front passenger s frontal air bag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator extinguishes even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system including booster seat Turn the ignition
321. r is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehi cle This number is also needed for replace ment or repair of the engine control unit integrated unit and combination meter CONTINUED 2 4 Keys and doors E Security indicator light RE 200702 The security indicator light deters potential thieves by indicating that the vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer system It begins flashing approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the ACC or LOCK po sition or immediately after the key is pulled out If the security indicator light does not flash the immobilizer system may be faulty If this occurs contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible In case an unauthorized key is used e g an imitation key the security indicator light comes on NOTE Even if the security indicator light flashes irregularly or its fuse blows the light does not flash if its fuse is blown the immobilizer system will function normally E Key replacement Your key number plate and security ID plate will be required if you ever need a re placement key made Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicle s immobilizer system before it can be used Up to four keys can be registered for use with one vehicle For security all the keys registered with your vehicles immobilizer system will have their ID
322. r operation of the turn signals the brake lights and parking lights each time you hitch up V Tires Never tow a trailer when the tempo rary spare tire is used The tempo rary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and or less stability of the vehicle Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated The recommended cold tire pressure un der trailer towing conditions is shown in chapter 12 Specifications and in GAS STATION REFERENCE atthe end of this manual Adjust the rear tire pressure to the recommended pressure when the tires are cold Normal pressure should be Driving tips 8 23 maintained in the front tires Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in ac cordance with the trailer manufacturer s specifications In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer ask a commercial road service to repair the flat tire If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured E Trailer towing tips e Never exceed 45 mph 72 km h when towing a trailer in hilly coun try on hot days When towing a trailer steering stability stopping distance and braking performance will be dif ferent from normal operation For saf
323. r operation of your SUBARU In addition some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline If you are not sure what the fuel contains you should ask your service station oper ators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been re formulated to reduce vehicle emissions As additional guidance only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following e Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual e Methanol methyl or wood alcohol is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5 of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by suffi cient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to pre vent damage to the fuel system Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT un der these conditions e H undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related try a different brand of gaso line before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer e Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of im proper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty Starting and operating 7 3 E Fuel filler lid and cap NA Co en eg 700301 V Refueling ke E
324. r flaps to use the an chorages 100526 3 Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the appropriate upper anchorage 4 Tighten the top tether securely When the child restraint system is to be secured using the top tether pass the top tether under the head restraint between the head restraint stay posts CN 100671 Be sure to install the top tether with the head restraint raised to the high est position If the head restraint is in any of the lower positions the top tether will touch the head restraint and the resulting slack will prevent its secure installation 100672 Do not route the top tether over the head restraint It may happen that the top tether cannot be fastened tightly V Third row seat 7 seater models 100649 1 Lower the head restraint to its lowest position 100676 2 Open the lid of the cargo area then re move the covers for the anchorages Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 43 100528 3 Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the appropriate upper anchorage 4 Tighten the top tether securely 100674 CONTINUED 1 44 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags Do not pass the top tether under the head restraint The top tether will touch the head restraint and the re sulting slack will prevent its secure installation 100673 Do no
325. r incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera tion Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage e Testing of an All Wheel Drive ve hicle must NEVER be performed on a single two wheel dynamome ter or similar apparatus Attempt ing to do so will result in transmis sion damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby e Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your vehicle Maintenance and service 1 1 3 Always be very careful to avoid in jury when working on the vehicle Remember that some of the mate rials in the vehicle may be hazard ous if improperly used or handled for example battery acid Your vehicle should only be ser viced by persons fully competent to do so Serious personal injury may result to persons not experi enced in servicing vehicles Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained Never get under the vehicle sup ported only by a jack Always use a safety stands to support the ve hicle Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area such as a garage or other closed areas Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery This will cause a fire Because the fuel system is under pressure replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer
326. r tie down hooks are located near each of the jack up reinforcements Use the rear tie down hooks only for downward anchoring If they are used to anchor the vehicle in any other direction cables may slip off the hooks possibly causing a dan gerous situation In case of emergency 9 17 E Using a flat bed truck Ab HAO 900226 This is the best way to transport your vehi cle Use the following procedures to en sure safe transportation 1 Shift the selector lever into the P po sition 2 Press the parking brake pedal firmly 3 Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out CONTINUED 9 18 In case of emergency E Towing with all wheels on the ground 900227 e Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the ve hicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not func tion when the engine is not run ning Because the engine is turned off it will take greater ef fort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel e If transmission failure occurs transport your vehicle on a flat bed truck Do not run the engine while being towed using this method Trans mission damage c
327. r tongue load Therefore the GVW changes de pending on the situation In addition the total weight applied to each axle GAW must never exceed the GAWR The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight ei ther front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR depending on the distribution of the luggage When possible the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle you should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi cle scale found at a commercial weighing station Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a high er load range than the originals do not in crease the GVWR and GAWR limitations Driving tips 8 13 E Roof rail and crossbar if equipped M 800252 e For cargo carrying purposes the roof molding must be used to gether with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying attach ment Otherwise damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result CONTINUED 8 14 Driving tips e When using the roof crossbar kit make sure that the total weight of the crossbars carrying attach ment and cargo does not exceed
328. raint systems section in this chapter Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which will record the use of the seatbelt s by the driver and front passenger when any of the SRS frontal side and curtain airbags deploys V Infants or small children Use a child restraint system that is suit able for your vehicle See information on Child restraint systems in this chapter V Children If a child is too big for a child restraint sys tem the child should sit in the rear seat CONTINUED 1 1 6 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags and be restrained using the seatbelts Ac cording to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck adjust the shoulder belt anchor height window side seating posi tions only and then if necessary move the child closer to the belt buckle to help pro vide a good shoulder belt fit Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the child s waist If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned a child restraint system should be used Never place the shoulder belt under the child s arm or behind the child s back V Expectant mothers 100100 Expectant mothers also need to use t
329. ration Non operation Operation 2 8 Audible signal Operation Non operation Operation 2 10 Key lock in prevention Key lock in prevention Operation Non operation Operation 2 6 Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 min Continuous opera Operation for 3 33 tion 15 min Windshield wiper deicer if Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 min Continuous opera Operation for 3 32 equipped tion 15 min Map light Dome light Operation in interlock with remote keyless OFF Short Normal Long Normal 6 2 entry system Battery drainage prevention func Battery drainage prevention function Operation Non operation Operation 2 6 tion EE 1 2 POWER SC EE 1 3 Reclining the seatback ccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 3 Head restraint adjustment seeeesseeeeeeeeees 1 4 Active head restraint ccccsessseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 1 5 Lumbar support eege Eege 1 5 Seat heater if equipped cee teceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 6 Rear seats 5 seater models Second row seats 7 seater models ee EEN 1 6 Fore and aft adjustment s eesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 Reclining the seatback ccccceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeees 1 8 Folding down the seatback c cccsssesseeeeeeneees 1 9 Head restraint adjustment c sseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 1 10 Sr TE E 1 11 Third row seat 7 seater models 0e0e 1 11 Access to the third row seat s
330. ration use the de froster with the airflow control button in HY and the temperature control dial set for maximum warmth After the wind shield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it wash it away using the windshield washer Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively If snow is stuck on the wiper arm pull off the road to a safe place then remove it If you stop the vehicle at road side use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers We recommend use of non freezing type CONTINUED 8 10 Driving tips wiper blades winter blades during the seasons you could have snow and sub zero temperatures Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle During high speed driving non freezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper blades If this happens reduce the vehicle speed NOTE When the season requiring non freez ing type wiper blades is over replace them with standard wiper blades E Corrosion protection Refer to the Corrosion protection section chapter 10 Snow tires e When replacing original tires with winter snow tires make sure you use only the same size and con struction as recommended Using other sizes or construction may affect speedometer odometer cal ibration and clearance between the body and tires It also may
331. rbag 1 59 SRS airbag system monitors cc eeteeteeeeeeees 1 66 SRS airbag system servicing EEN 1 67 Precautions against vehicle modification 1 68 1 2 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags Front seats e The SRS airbags deploy with con e Never adjust the seat while driv ing to avoid the possibility of loss of vehicle control and of personal injury Before adjusting the seat make sure the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism Seatbelts provide maximum re straint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running If the front seatbacks are not used in the up right position in a collision the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase and both can result in serious internal injury or death siderable speed and force Occu pants who are out of proper posi tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi cal while still maintaining full ve hicle control and the front passen ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright a
332. re key is used to lock the driv er s door from the outside of the vehicle the door is locked e tis possible to lock the all doors and the rear gate by holding the side of the door locking switch pushed for three sec onds with the driver s door open and then closing the driver s door This function s operative non operative Keys and doors 2 7 setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer Contact a SUBARU dealer for de tails NOTE When leaving the vehicle make sure you are holding the key before locking the doors 2 8 Keys and doors Remote keyless entry sys tem e Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks such as those ex perienced as a result of dropping or throwing Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the bat tery Do not get the transmitter wet If it gets wet wipe it dry with a cloth immediately This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including in terference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not express ly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Two transmitters are provided for your ve hicle The keyless entry system has the fo
333. re to wipe it off Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface CONTINUED 1 1 1 2 Maintenance and service V Changing the coolant Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys tem conditioner whenever the coolant is replaced Change the engine coolant and add gen uine Subaru cooling system conditioner using the following procedures according to the maintenance schedule in the War ranty and Maintenance Booklet 1 Remove the under cover B00310 2 Place a proper container under the drain plug and loosen the drain plug 3 Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator Then drain the coolant from the reserve tank Tighten the drain plug securely Never attempt to remove the radia tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down com pletely Since the coolant is under pressure you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed 4 Install the under cover B00311 1 Fill up to here 5 Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to just below the filler neck allowing enough room to add genuine Subaru cooling sys tem conditioner in the radiator Add genu ine Subaru cooling system conditioner un til the coolant level reaches the filler neck Do not pour the coolant too quickly as this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trap
334. re worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident The entire assembly should be replaced even if dam age is not obvious e Put children aged 12 and under in a rear seat properly restrained at all times The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly re strained Because children are lighter and weaker than adults their risk of being injured from de ployment is greater Consequent ly we strongly recommend that ALL children including those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint devices sit in a REAR seat properly re strained at all times in a child re straint device or in a seatbelt whichever is appropriate for the child s height and weight Always secure ALL types of child restraint devices including for ward facing child seats in one of the rear seating positions recom mended in this owner s manual NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating posi tions than in the front seating po sitions For instructions and pre cautions concerning the child re straint system see the Child re st
335. rection once Now the desired speed is set and the ve hicle will keep running at that speed with out depressing the accelerator pedal E Cruise control indicator light 700322 The cruise control indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approxi mately three seconds The light comes on when the CRUISE main switch is pressed CONTINUED 7 30 Starting and operating If you move the cruise control lever while turning the ignition switch ON the cruise control function is deactivated and the CRUISE indicator light flashes To reac tivate the cruise control function turn the ignition switch back to the ACC or LOCK position and then turn it again to the ON position E Cruise control set indicator light 700323 The cruise control set indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after approximately three seconds The light comes on when vehicle speed has been set New vehicle break in driving the first 1 000 miles 1 600 KM dieses eege dd Fuel economy hints ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Engine exhaust gas Carbon monoxide Catalytic converter cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Periodic inspections ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Driving in foreign countries assesses Driving tips for AWD vehicles
336. red in an acci dent if their child restraints are not proper ly secured in the vehicle When installing the child restraint system carefully follow the manufacturer s instructions According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions All U S states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving 100125 Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot pro tect the child from injury in a colli sion because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle Addition ally holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force the child could be injured or even killed 100126 Children should be properly re strained at all times Never allow a child to stand up or to kneel on any seat Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an accident and can be injured seriously Additionally children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed another serious danger Since the SRS airbag de ploys with considerable speed and force the child could be injured or e
337. ree top tether anchorages five in the 7 seater models so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be installed in a rear seating position When installing a child restraint system using top tether proceed as follows while observing the in structions by the child restraint system manufacturer Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or avail able V Tether anchorage location V Rear seat 5 seater models Sec ond row seat 7 seater models 100523 Three tether anchorages i e ones for the right center and left seats are already in stalled on the back of each seatback Open the cover flap to use each anchor age Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 41 V Third row seat 7 seater models 100524 Two tether anchorages are attached to the rear edge of the cargo area Open the cover flap to use each anchor age CONTINUED 1 42 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags V To hook the top tether V Rear seat 5 seater models Sec ond row seat 7 seater models 1 Raise the head restraint to the highest position at the seating position where the child seat has been installed using the seatbelt or lower anchorages lift up the head restraint while pressing the release button 100525 2 Open the cove
338. revent a change in weight distribution while driving Vv Tongue load 800214 Tongue load If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer s axle than in the front the load is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle This may cause the rear wheels to skid especially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced dur ing cornering resulting in over steer spin out and or jackknifing Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the appropriate one of the following maximum values Vehicle without cooling kit 200 Ibs 90 kg Vehicle with cooling kit 350 Ibs 158 kg 800215 1 Jack 2 Bathroom scale The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the following illustration When weighing the tongue load be sure to position the towing cou pler at the height at which it would be dur ing actual towing using a jack as shown 60 40 50 50 800216 F Front The tongue load can be adjusted by prop er distribution of the load in the trailer Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40 percent in the rear Also distribute the load as even ly as possible on both the left and right sides Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a cha
339. rive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator it will re sult in the need for costly brake ro tor repair or replacement DA ZS 700040 The front disc brake and the right rear disc brake have audible wear indicators on the brake pads If the brake pads wear close to their service limit the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible E Breaking in of new brake pads and linings When replacing the brake pad or lining use only genuine SUBARU parts After re placement the new parts must be broken in as follows V Brake pad and lining While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph 50 to 65 km h step on the brake pedal lightly Repeat this five or more times V Parking brake lining AAWARNING A safe location and situation should be selected for break in driving Pressing the parking brake pedal too forcefully may cause the rear wheels to lock To avoid this be cer tain to press the pedal slowly and gently 1 Drive the vehicle at a speed of approx imately 22 mph 35 km h 2 Press the parking brake pedal SLOW LY and GENTLY Pressing with a force of approximately 34 Ibs 150 N 15 kg 3 Drive the vehicle for approximately 220 yards 200 meters in this condition 4 Wait 5 to
340. river s side e Side airbag module Front passenger s side e Curtain airbag sensor Rear wheel house right hand side e Curtain airbag sensor Rear wheel house left hand side e Curtain airbag module Right side e Curtain airbag module Left side e Seatbelt pretensioner Driver s side e Seatbelt pretensioner Front passen ger s side e Seatbelt buckle switch Driver s side e Seatbelt buckle switch Front passen ger s side e Driver s seat position sensor e Front passenger s seatbelt tension sen sor e Front passenger s occupant detection system weight sensor e Front passengers occupant detection control module e Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator e All related wiring If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre tensioners and or SRS airbag sys tem Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked Unless checked and properly repaired the seatbelt pretensioners and or SRS airbags will operate improperly e g SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi nor collision or not inflate in a se vere collision which may increase the risk of injury e Flashing or flickering of the warn ing light e No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position e Continuous illumination of the warning light e Illumination of t
341. rol system OFF indicator light agereecht eer geit e See 3 18 CORE SWIGIV eelere 7 23 Trailer ele E 8 15 eler 8 21 TOWING E 8 17 OWI GTIDS EE 8 23 Rate EE 3 7 Turn signal Indicator lights E 3 20 Lever ee ee 3 27 U Under floor storage compartment ssnnennnnennnneeeneeereeeene 6 12 14 8 Index V VIE n 2 17 VT Au tee 6 4 Vehicle Capacity weight dee EEN 8 12 e Dette elen EE 12 9 Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation indicator obt 3 18 kl EE 7 19 Warning CUI E 3 18 KA TEE 4 2 WwW Warning and indicator lights seseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 9 Warning lights Eeer 3 15 EN eeh Driv eren Eeer Deg 3 17 Anti lock Brake System cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 15 AT OIL TEMPerature e 3 13 tee SUSI eene 3 16 CARS E E E E A EA eeee 3 13 CHECK ENGINE paee EKE OEA S AEREE Ee 3 12 Elei len WEE 3 17 LOW TG EE 3 8 3 17 LOW tire pressure ececcecececceeeeeceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaanes 3 14 ON Bel E 3 13 Rear differential oil temperature cceeeeeeeee 3 14 e EE 3 10 SRS airbag system EE 3 11 Vehicle Dynamics Control ccceseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 7 21 Windshield washer fluid ee 3 17 Warranties and maintenance cccceeeeecceceeeceeeeeeeeeees 8 17 WV SING EE 10 2 Waxing and polishing WEE 10 3 Wear indicators dee eeeteeAEEAE ee EER Ae 11 27 Wheel Se Tel E 12 4 ACS Sich bath nccd iam cut anv E A ea O A E a hccade 11 27 GE EE 11 29 WIRG
342. roper use of seat belts and child restraints locking the doors reduces the chance of be ing thrown out of the vehicle in an accident Keys and doors 2 5 It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acciden tally opened and intruders from un expectedly opening doors and en tering your vehicle 200706 To lock the door from the inside rotate the lock lever rearward CONTINUED 2 6 Keys and doors 200707 To unlock the door from the inside rotate the lock lever forward The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked Pull the inside door handle to open an un locked door Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are closed and locked before starting to drive E Battery drainage prevention function When a door or the rear gate is not com pletely closed and the map light dome light ignition switch light and door open warning light remain illuminated as a re sult the lights are automatically turned off by the battery drainage prevention func tion after 10 minutes of illumination to pre vent the battery from going dead The op erational non operational setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer if you would like to change the set ting NOTE e When leaving the vehicle please make sure that all doors and the rear gate are completely closed e The battery drainage
343. rror clears before that time push the button to turn it off It also turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position If defrosting or defogging is de sired when you restart your vehicle you have to push the button to turn it on again NOTE e While the outside mirror defogger is operating the rear window defogger also operates e When the rear window defogger has been set for continuous operation the outside mirror defogger also operates continuously Refer to the Rear win dow defogger button section in this chapter To prevent the battery from being discharged do not operate the de fogger continuously for any longer than necessary Tilt steering wheel Horn Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position while driving This may cause loss of vehicle control and re sult in personal injury 1 Adjust the seat position Refer to the Front seats section chapter 1 2 Pull the tilt lock lever down 3 Move the steering wheel to the desired level 4 Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place 5 Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down To sound the horn push the horn pad Instruments and controls 3 37 Climate control Ventilla de EE PAUP dE CHE e Automatic climate control system ssassn Control panel s eet tee ee Rear air conditioner if equipped En Temperature Senso
344. rs ccccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Operating tips for heater and air conditioner Cleaning ventilator grille EE EE Efficient cooling after parking in direct s nlight E 4 10 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant CUR GUIDE EE 4 10 Checking air conditioning system before SUMMET SEASON seca cienctesdetcciresctdetescncentans tectcnerdtbend 4 10 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low temperature weather condition 4 10 Air conditioner compressor shut off when engine is heavily loaded ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 Refrigerant for your climate control system 4 10 Air filtration system eege Ee 4 11 Replacing the air filter sek 4 11 Climate control 4 3 V Air flow mode selection CONTINUED 4 4 Climate control E Ventilator Vv Center ventilators Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction V Side ventilator ey II H q 2 Close Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direction To open the ventilator turn the side grille open close wheel upward To close it turn the wheel downward V Rear ventilators if equipped i 400505 Move the tab up and down or right and left to adjust the flow direct
345. rs and return for an emission re inspection e Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service Preparing to drive You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving 1 Check that all windows mirrors and lights are clean and unobstructed 2 Check the appearance and condition of the tires Also check tires for proper infla tion 3 Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks 4 Check that the hood and rear gate are fully closed 5 Check the adjustment of the seat 6 Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors 7 Fasten your seatbelt Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts 8 Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position 9 Check the gauges indicator and warn ing lights after starting the engine NOTE Engine oil engine coolant brake fluid washer fluid and other fluid levels should be checked daily weekly or at fuel stops Starting the engine e Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten seconds If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for five to ten seconds wait for ten sec onds or more before trying again If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving shift the selec tor lever into the N position Do not attempt to place the selector lever of a moving vehi
346. rtain airbag are designed to function on a one time only basis SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment depend on the level of force experienced in the passenger compart ment during a side impact collision That level differs from one type of collision to another and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle it self CONTINUED 1 64 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags V Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag will most likely de ploy 200320 A severe side impact near the front seat activates the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag V Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS cur tain airbag are unlikely to deploy 100540 5 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 65 The vehicle is involved in an oblique side on impact The vehicle is involved in a side on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object The vehicle is involved in a side on impact from a motorcycle The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy ment In the event of accidents like those illustrated the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident f
347. s Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine coolant tempera ture gauge exceeds the normal operating range the cooling fan circuit may be de fective Check the fuse and replace it if necessary If the fuse is not blown have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer If frequent addition of coolant is neces sary there may be a leak in the engine cooling system It is recommended that the cooling system and connections be checked for leaks damage or looseness E Engine coolant Vv Checking the coolant level B00309 Check the coolant level at each fuel stop 1 Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the engine is cool 2 If the level is close to or lower than the LOW level mark add coolant up to the FULL level mark If the reserve tank is empty remove the radiator cap and refill as required Maintenance and service 1 1 1 1 B00018 3 After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator reinstall the caps and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the proper position e Be careful not to spill engine cool ant when adding it If coolant touches the exhaust pipe it may cause a bad smell smoke and or a fire If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe be su
348. s including forward facing child seats in the REAR seats at all times You should choose a restraint de vice which is appropriate for the child s age height and weight Ac cording to accident statistics chil dren are safer when properly re strained in the rear seating posi tions than in the front seating posi tions N 100261 SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER S SRS AIRBAG DO NOT INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFE TY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSEN GER S SEAT DOING SO RISKS SE RIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG E Choosing a child restraint system 100502 Choose a child restraint system that is ap propriate for the child s age and size weight and height in order to provide the child with proper protection The child re straint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for United States or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufacture s statement of compli ance in the document attached to the sys tem Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is com patible with the vehicle in which it will be used Installing child restraint sys tems with A ELR seatbelt e Child restraint systems and seat belts can become hot in a ve
349. s elapsed since the ignition switch was Instruments and controls 3 25 turned to the START position e amp I e i ET IA LI A 300563 The journey time indication flashes each time a complete hour has elapsed If the display is giving an indication other than the journey time the display switches to the journey time flashes for five seconds and returns to its original indication each time a complete hour has elapsed NOTE The journey time is reset when the igni tion switch is turned to the OFF posi tion It is also reset if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK or ACC position prior to restarting of the engine 3 26 Instruments and controls Light control switch To prevent battery discharge result ing from accidentally leaving your lights on when your vehicle is parked the light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position In any other posi tion the vehicle s lights will be out If you park your vehicle on a road side at night use the hazard warn ing flasher to alert the other drivers The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position E Headlights 300506 To turn on the headlights turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever zooz first position Parking lights instrument panel illumina tion tail lights and license plate light are on ZO second po
350. s floor pan and fenders and suspension Thoroughly flush the underbody and in side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corro sion After driving off road or muddy or sandy roads wash the mud and sand off the un derbody Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts as they are particularly prone to mud and sand buildup Do not use a sharp edged tool to remove caked mud NOTE Be careful not to damage brake hoses sensor harnesses and other parts when washing suspension compo nents V Using a warm water washer e Keep a good distance of 12 in 30 cm or more between the washer nozzle and the vehicle e Do not wash the same area continuous ly e If a stain will not come out easily wash by hand Some warm water washers are of the high temperature high pressure type and they can damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings or cause water to leak into the vehicle E Waxing and polishing Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing Use a good quality polish and wax and ap ply them according to the manufacturer s instructions Wax or polish when the paint ed surface is cool Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the painted surfaces Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens th
351. s 7 2 Fuel filler lid and cap e ceesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 3 State emission testing U S only een 7 5 Preparing to gege ees 7 6 Starting the engine cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 7 Stopping the engine cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 8 Automatic transmission EEN 7 8 Gelee n EES 7 9 Selector lever reverse inhibiting function 7 10 Selection of manual mode 2 cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11 Maximum speedS ic c cic nccncecetdecatsencleccewdenntvedecdcseursemens 7 12 Driving tips E 7 13 SPORT mode ege ees ege 7 13 Shift lock release Zoe Gegegipeegbesetzegegi e ssebegesce ere Sefete 7 14 Power steering WE 7 15 Braking EE 7 15 Braking CDS asssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 7 15 Brake system ssssssssssssnnsnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nanna 7 15 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators 7 16 ABS Anti lock Brake System cccceeeeees 7 16 ABS system Self CheCK eeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 7 17 ABS warning light ccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 17 Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD CET E 7 18 Steps to take if EBD system fails un 7 18 Vehicle Dynamics Control system een 7 19 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor 7 21 Starting and operating Traction Control system OFF switch 0 7 23 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 7 24 Parking
352. s and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags In the event of the SRS side airbag de ployment they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicle s occupants and cause injuries CONTINUED 1 62 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags e Do not attach a hands free micro phone or any other accessory to a front pillar a center pillar a rear pillar the windshield a side win dow an assist grip or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag A hands free microphone or other accessory in such a location could be propelled through the cabin with great force by the cur tain airbag or it could prevent correct deployment of the curtain airbag In either case the result could be serious injuries 600516 Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deploy ment of the SRS curtain airbags they could cause serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks and being thrown through the cabin or by pre venting deployment of the curtain airbags Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks make sure there are no sharp objects in the pockets Hang cloth ing directly on the coat hooks with out using hangers 100280 Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other objects over either front seatback and do not attach la bels or stickers to the front seat
353. s at 9 mph 15 km h or lower for 15 minutes e The battery voltage decreases below the permissible level Rear window defogger but ton The rear window defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON po sition The rear window defogger button is locat ed on the climate control panel To turn on the defogger push the button To turn it off push the button again The indicator light located on the button lights up while the rear window defogger is operating The defogger will automatically shut off af ter approximately 15 minutes If the win dow clears before that time push the but ton to turn it off It also turns off when the Instruments and controls 3 33 ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position If defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle you have to push the button to turn it on again Your SUBARU dealer can set your rear window defogger for continuous opera tion Contact your SUBARU dealer for de tails Once the rear window defogger has been set for continuous operation the rear win dow defogger repeatedly operates for 15 minutes stops for two minutes and again operates for 15 minutes If the battery volt age drops below the permissible level continuous operation is canceled and op eration stops as described in the follow ing e H the battery voltage drops below the permissible level within 15 minutes of de pressio
354. s cup holder Vv Armrest TS 600419 A dual cup holder is built in the armrest When a cup containing a beverage is in the cup holder do not slide or recline any seat Otherwise the bev erage could spill while driving and if the beverage is hot it could scald you CONTINUED 6 8 interior equipment Vv Door pocket lt 600420 The door pockets can be used to hold beverage bottles and other items When placing a beverage in a door pocket make sure it is capped Oth erwise the beverage could spill when opening closing the door or while driving and if the beverage is hot it could scald you E Third row seat cup holders 7 seater models Ka ga 600421 A cup holder is located at each side of the third row seat When placing a beverage in a cup holder make sure it is capped Oth erwise the beverage could spill while driving and if the beverage is hot it could scald you Accessory power outlets 600422 600423 Accessory power outlets are provided in the center console lower compartment and in the cargo area Electrical power 12V DC from the battery is available at any of the outlets when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position You can use an in car use electrical appli ance by connecting it to an outlet When both outlets are used at the same time the total power consumption of the electri
355. s replaced without the original pressure sen sor transmitter being transferred the low tire pressure warning light will flash This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels Contact your SUBARU deal er as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and or system resetting Do not inject any tire liquid or aero sol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors If the light flash es promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspect ed Do not place metal film or any metal parts under the driver s seat This may cause poor reception of the sig nals from the tire pressure sensors and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including in terference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not express ly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Starting and operating 7 25 Parking your vehicle e Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent opera tion of the vehicle Also
356. s to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force The SRS airbags deploy with con siderable speed and force Occu pants who are out of proper posi tion when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practi cal while still maintaining full ve hicle control and the front passen ger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or be tween you and the SRS airbag If the SRS airbag deploys those ob jects could interfere with its prop er operation and could be pro pelled inside the vehicle and cause injury CONTINUED 1 46 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 100350 e Put children aged 12 and under in a rear seat properly restrained at all times The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly re strained Because children are lighter and weaker than adults their risk of being injured from de ployment is greater Consequently we strongly rec ommend that ALL children in cluding those in child seats and those that have outgrown child re straint devices sit i
357. s too is a consequence of the Vehicle Dynamics Control opera tional check and is normal e In the circumstances listed in the fol lowing the vehicle may be more unsta ble than it feels to the driver The Vehi cle Dynamics Control System may therefore operate Such operation does not indicate a system fault e on gravel covered or rutted roads e on unfinished roads e when the vehicle is towing a trailer e when the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or winter tires e Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly dif ferent compared to that for normal con ditions e Even if the vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system it is important that winter tires be used when driving on snow covered or icy roads All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size and brand Furthermore if snow chains are to be used they should be fitted on the front wheels When a vehicle is fitted with snow chains however the effective ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the ve hicle in such a condition e It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner even if the vehicle is equipped with Ve hicle Dynamics Control e All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size type and brand furthermore the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires If
358. se resulting in a serious acci dent When using the spare tire hoist After the temporary spare tire is removed from the cable wind the cable up completely until the re tainer at end of the cable sits against the underside of the vehi cle Driving with the cable not re tracted fully could result in dam age to the adjacent under floor parts and lead to a serious acci dent The spare tire holder is designed to carry only the following kinds of tires e the temporary spare tire that came with your vehicle e a full size flat tire A full size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only After having the full size flat tire repaired im mediately swap it with the tempo rary spare tire Never stow a full size tire that is not flat in the spare tire holder Doing so can result in damage to adjacent under floor parts and can lead to a serious accident When using the spare tire hoist Do not use air tools or power tools to turn the spare tire hoist shaft end If you do it could result in severe mechanical damage to the spare tire hoist E Re storage of spare tire 1 Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently enough to allow the cable end retainer go through center hole of the temporary spare tire 2 Insert the retainer through the center hole of the temporary tire with the outside of the tire f
359. shield washer fluid warning light comes on or the supply of washer flu id drops check the level of washer fluid in the tank Low 300172 Washer fluid level gauge Remove the washer tank filler cap then check the fluid level indicated by the level gauge attached to the inside of the cap If the level is near the Low mark add flu id until it reaches the Hi level on the level gauge After adding fluid make sure the wind shield washer fluid warning light has gone out Use windshield washer fluid If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean wa ter In areas where water freezes in winter use an anti freeze type windshield washer fluid SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58 5 methyl alcohol and 41 5 surfactant by volume Its freezing temper ature varies according to how much it is di luted as indicated in the following table Washer Fluid Freezing Concentration Temperature 30 10 4 F 12 C 50 4 F 20 C 100 49 F 45 C Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause paint damage In order to prevent freezing of washer flu id check the freezing temperatures in the table above when adjusting the fluid con centration to the outside temperature If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and was
360. side door is in the LOCK position the passengers windows cannot be operated with the passengers switches 2 22 Keys and doors Rear gate 200735 The rear gate can be locked and unlocked using either the keyless entry system or the power door locking switch Refer to the Power door locking switches and Remote keyless entry system sec tions in this chapter To open the rear gate first unlock the rear gate lock then push the button E Ee d S 200736 To close the rear gate lower it slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull it down holding the recessed grip e To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle al ways keep the rear gate closed while driving Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip Also avoid closing the rear gate by pulling on the recessed grip from inside the cargo space There is a danger of your hand be ing caught and injured 200894 1 Reflectors When the rear gate is open do not place a heavy item on either reflec tor Also do not sit on either reflec tor Doing so could break the reflec tor e Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo That could cause leakage of gas from the stays which may result in their inability to hold
361. sition Headlights parking lights instrument pan el illumination tail lights and license plate light are on E High low beam change dim mer 300507 To change from low beam to high beam push the turn signal lever forward When the headlights are on high beam the high beam indicator light ZO on the instru ment panel is also on To switch back to low beam pull the lever back to the detent position E Headlight flasher 300508 Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds To flash the headlights pull the lever to ward you and then release it The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever The headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the OFF position When the headlights are on high beam the high beam indicator light ZO on the instrument panel also comes on E Daytime running light system The tail lights parking lights and side marker lights are not turned on by the daytime running light system The light switch must always be turned to the D position when it is dark outside The low beam headlights will automatical ly come on at reduced brightness when the engine has started under the follow ing conditions e The parking brake is fully released e The light switch is in the OFF or speis position Turn signal lever 300509
362. sition R E Vehicle Dynamics Con trol warning light Trac tion Control system OFF indicator light This warning light has both the function of indicating faults in the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and the function of indicat ing that the Traction Control system has been deactivated It comes on in the event of a fault in the system and is on when the system is not operating This warning light comes on when the ig nition switch is turned to the ON position and goes out after the engine has started It indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in normal operation V Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably inoperative under any of the fol lowing conditions Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediate ly e The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position e The warning light comes on while the vehicle is running e f the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dy namics Control system itself becomes faulty the warning light only comes on At this time the ABS Anti lock Brake Sys tem remains fully operational e The warning light comes on when the electronic control system of the ABS Vehi cle Dynamics Control system becomes faulty The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its ABS control through the elec trical circuit of the ABS system Accord ingly if the ABS is inoperative the
363. smitter e Any door including the rear gate is opened e Ignition switch is turned to the ON position E Disarming the system Briefly press the g button for less than two seconds on the remote transmit ter The driver s door will unlock an elec tronic chirp will sound twice the turn sig nal lights will flash twice and the indicator light will go off To unlock all other doors and the rear gate briefly press the g button a second time within 5 seconds NOTE If the interval between the first and sec ond presses of the g button for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate is extremely short the sys tem may not respond V Emergency disarming If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter i e the transmitter is lost bro ken or the transmitter battery is too weak you can disarm the system without using the transmitter The system can be disarmed if you turn the ignition switch from the LOCK to the ON position with a registered key E Valet mode When you choose the valet mode the alarm system does not operate In valet mode the remote transmitter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate and panic activation To enter the valet mode change the set ting of your vehicle s alarm system for de activation mode Refer to Activating and deactivating the alarm system in this sec tion The security indicator light wi
364. smitter the lost transmit ter s code remains in the memory For se curity reasons lost transmitter codes should be deleted from the memory To delete old transmitter codes program four transmitter codes into the system If you have only one current transmitter program it four times If you have two cur rent transmitters program each one twice If you have three current transmitters pro gram two of them once and the third one twice This process will leave only current transmitter codes in the system s memory NOTE Make sure no one else is operating their keyless entry system within range of your vehicle when programming transmitters If someone else were to operate their remote transmitter while you are programming your transmit ters it is possible that their transmitter code will be programmed into your system allowing them unauthorized access to your vehicle Alarm system The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft The horn sounds and the turn signal lights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehi cle The system can be armed and disarmed with the remote transmitter The system does not operate when the key is inserted into the ignition switch Your vehicle s alarm system has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory You can set the system for de activation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer E System alarm operatio
365. soline or a solvent such as paint thinner or benzene This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades NOTE e The front wiper motor is protected against overloads by a circuit breaker If the motor operates continuously un der an unusually heavy load the circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor tem porarily If this happens park your ve hicle in a safe place turn off the wiper switch and wait for approximately 10 minutes The circuit breaker will reset itself and the wipers will again operate normally e Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a washer solu tion to prevent streaking and to re move accumulations of road salt or road film Keep the washer button de pressed at least for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window e Grease wax insects or other materi al on the windshield or the wiper blades results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass If you can not remove those streaks after operat ing the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window and the wip er blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abra sive cleaner After cleaning rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with water e If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this proc
366. ss has an anti glare feature which automatically re duces glare coming from headlights of ve hicles behind you It also contains a built in compass e By pressing and releasing the left but ton the automatic dimming function is tog gled on or off When the automatic dim ming function is on the auto dimming indi cator light green located to the right of the button will illuminate e By pressing and releasing the right but ton the compass display is toggled on or off When the compass is on an illuminat ed compass reading will appear in the lower part of the mirror Even with the mirror in anti glare mode the mirror surface turns bright if the trans mission is shifted into reverse This is to ensure good rearward visibility during re versing YV Photosensors L Bo 300518 The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the front and back sides If the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you strikes the mirror these sensors detect it and make the reflection surface of the mir ror dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded For this reason use care not to cover the sensors with stickers or other similar items Periodically wipe the sen sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an applicator Vv Compass calibration 1 For optimum calibration switch off all nonessential electrical accessories rear window defogger heater air conditioning system spotlight etc
367. ssure warning light EE 3 14 EE 3 3 ABS warning light ENEE el EE 3 4 Brake system warning light EE START WEE 3 4 Low fuel warning light seess Key reminder chime EEN 3 4 Door open warning light een Ignition switch light ceceeesseeeeeseeeeenseeeneeees 3 4 Windshield washer fluid warning light 3 17 Hazard warning flasher EEN 3 5 All Wheel Drive warning light sssseee 3 17 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator Meters and Gauge ENEE 3 5 TEEN 3 18 Combination meter illumination ee 3 5 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light Traction Canceling the function for meter needle gauge Control system OFF indicator light 3 18 movement and combination meter sequential Security indicator light c ssscsscssssceecesseseeseeseees 3 19 illumination upon turning on the ignition SPORT mode indicator light c e sssssssecsssseesseeees 3 19 d EE 3 5 Selector lever Gear position indicator 3 20 Speedometer DT 3 6 Turn signal indicator lights Dee 3 20 Odometer EE Eege 3 6 High beam indicator light css csssessscesseeeeeeeees 3 20 Double trip metet os ccc ace csc rse cz stee ose careseezeceb aeai tapa 3 7 Cruise control indicator light eet e Ee 3 20 ET lu EE 3 7 Cruise control set indicator light SEENEN 3 20 Fuel GEI le LTE 3 8 Headlight indicator light E AR Sn Rae NO an 3 20 Temperature gauge ccsseeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 8 Front fog light indicator ligh
368. st be replaced Use only replacements with the same speci fied rating as the melted main fuse If a main fuse blows after it is replaced have the electrical system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer 1 1 38 Maintenance and service Installation of accessories Always consult your SUBARU dealer be fore installing fog lights or any other elec trical equipment in your vehicle Such ac cessories may cause the electronic sys tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the ve hicle nd service 11 39 intenance a Replacing bulbs CGY lt Q 14 13 12 15 CONTINUED 1 1 40 Maintenance and service 1 High beam headlight 2 Low beam headlight 3 Front turn signal Parking light 4 Parking Front side marker light 5 Map light 6 Dome light 7 Door step light 8 Fog light 9 Cargo area light 10 Tail light 11 Brake tail light 12 Rear turn signal light 13 Backup light 14 Rear gate light 15 Licence plate light Wattage 12V 65W 12V 55W 12V 27 8W 12V 5W 12V 8W 12V 5W 12V 3W 12V 55W 12V 13W 12V 3 8W 12V 21 5W 12V 21W 12V 16W 12V 5W 12V 5W Bulb No H3 194 W21 5W W21W 921 W5W 168 Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage Using a bulb of different wattage could re sult in a fire E Headlight Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use
369. stem inoper ative possibly resulting in seri ous injury Seatbelt pretensioners have no user serviceable parts For required servicing of front seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners see your nearest SUBARU dealer CONTINUED 1 28 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags e When discarding front seatbelt re tractor assemblies or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons con sult your SUBARU dealer E System monitors AIR BAG 100385 SRS airbag system warning light A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner while the vehicle is being driven The seat belt pretensioners share the control mod ule with the airbag system Therefore if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pre tensioner the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate The SRS airbag sys tem warning light will show normal system operation by lighting for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The following components are monitored by the indicator e Front sub sensor Right hand side e Front sub sensor Left hand side e Airbag control module including impact sensors e Frontal airbag module Driver s side e Frontal airbag module Front passen ger s side e Side airbag sensor Center pillar right hand side e Side airbag sensor Center pillar left hand side e Side airbag module D
370. switch to the OFF posi tion if the front passenger s frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indi cator extinguishes even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system including booster seat Remove the child restraint system from the seat By refer ring to the child restraint manufacturer s recommendations as well as the child re straint system installation procedures in the Child restraint systems section in this chapter correctly install the child restraint CONTINUED 1 54 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags system Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and make sure that the front passenger s frontal airbag ON indicator goes out and the OFF indicator comes on If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator extinguishes take the following actions e Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant e Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket If the ON indicator still illuminates while the OFF indicator extinguishes after tak ing relevant corrective actions described above relocate the child restraint system to one of the rear seating positions recom mended in this owner s manual and imme diately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection NOTE When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passen
371. switch turned to the ON position if both the ON and OFF indica tors remain lit or extinguished simulta neously even after the system check peri od the system is faulty Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an in spection V Conditions in which front passen ger s SRS frontal airbag is not acti vated The front passenger s SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the fol lowing conditions are met regarding the front passenger s seat e The seat is empty e The seat is equipped with a rearward facing child restraint system and an infant is restrained with it See WARNING that follows e The seat is equipped with a forward fac ing child restraint system and a small child is restrained with it See WARNING that follows e The seat is equipped with a booster seat and a small child is in the booster seat See WARNING that follows e The seat is relieved of the occupant load for a time exceeding the predeter mined monitoring time period e The seat is occupied by a child who has outgrown a child restraint system See WARNING that follows or by a small adult e The front passenger s occupant detec tion system is faulty NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER S SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER S SRS FRON TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED Be sure to install it in one of the rear seating positions recommended in this owner s manual in a correct manne
372. system does not impede nor mal starting of the engine If the engine fails to start pull out the key once before trying again Refer to the Ig nition switch section chapter 3 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including in terference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not express ly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment NOTE To protect your vehicle from theft please pay close attention to the fol lowing security precautions e Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside e Before leaving your vehicle close all windows and lock the doors and rear gate e Do not leave spare keys or any record of your key number in the vehi cle e Do not place the key under direct sunlight or anywhere it may be come hot e Do not get the key wet If the key gets wet wipe it dry with a cloth immediately Keys and doors 2 3 E Security ID plate 200701 1 Key number plate 2 Security ID plate The security ID is stamped on the security ID plate attached to the key set Write down the security ID and keep it in another safe place not in the vehicle This numbe
373. t ssssssssee0 3 20 Warning and indicator lights e 3 9 GIO GK EE 3 21 Seatbelt warning light and chime un 3 10 e DEEG SRS airbag system warning light eceeee 3 11 Outside temperature indication e 3 21 Front passenger s frontal airbag ON and OFF Multi function display Vehicle without JEE 3 12 Navigation System ssceceeeeeeseesseeeeseeeees 3 23 CHECK ENGINE warning light Malfunction Current fuel Consumption een 3 23 indicator lamp eege dee EE eEEeeE Seege 3 12 Average fuel consumption keen 3 23 Charge warning light seseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 Driving range on remaining fuel een 3 24 Oil pressure warning light een 3 13 Journey time 00 Seet eegeren eege 3 25 AT OIL TEMPerature warning light 3 13 Instruments and controls Light Control switch assssssssssssssnsnnsnnsnnnunnnnnnnnnnne 3 26 Headlights deet ee 3 26 High low beam change dimmer cceee 3 26 Headlight flasher aisc cccccccs sccssseesssecsestececneceasstendscnese 3 26 Daytime running light system ccceeeeeeeeees 3 27 Turn signal lever eebe eege eege 3 27 Illumination brightness control een 3 27 Parking light switch ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 28 Front fog light switch ceeteeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 28 Wiper and washer e ucteeg gege Eege NEE uge 3 29 Windshield wiper and washer switches 3 30 Rear window wiper and washer sw
374. t downward to remove it In stall a new bulb 3 Reinstall the lens E Map light 1 Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat head screwdriver Maintenance and service 1 1 45 700084 2 Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at its ends are aligned vertically Pull the bulb straight downward to remove it 3 Install a new bulb 4 Reinstall the lens E Door step light It may be difficult to replace the bulbs Have your SUBARU dealer replace the bulbs if necessary CONTINUED 1 1 46 Maintenance and service E Cargo area light 700079 00078 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket Install a new bulb 4 Reinstall the lens 1 Remove the cargo area light assembly by prying the edge of the light with a flat head screwdriver 2 Remove the lens from the cargo area light assembly Specifications SPECHIG AT ONS ee EE 12 2 Dimensions EE 12 2 Lt Le TE 12 2 Electrical system EE 12 3 Ee 12 3 Tires cee eet os Ri ae ee 12 3 Wheel alignment iis vnc ccvedesceisettenctaccsteecteeitanreeeetss 12 4 Fuses and circuits sage eege deeg ddeeige 12 5 Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment EE 12 5 Fuse panel located in the engine compartment E 12 7 Bulb chart E 12 8 Vehicle identification ccccssessseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 12 9 12 2 Specifications Specifications These specifications are subject to change without
375. t use the top tether with the head restraint in a raised position otherwise the top tether cannot be fastened tightly 100650 Prevent the top tether from touching cargo in the cargo area The top tether may become slack if the car go changes shape or moves SRS airbag Supplemental Restraint System airbag SRS This stands for supplemental re straint system This name is used be cause the airbag system supplements the vehicle s seatbelts Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which will record the use of the seatbelt s by the driver and front passenger when any of the SRS frontal side and curtain airbags deploys E Your vehicle s SRS configu ration The drivers seat the front passenger s seat and the outboard seats of the rear second seating row of your vehicle are each provided with in addition to a lap shoulder belt one or more airbags as fol lows e Frontal airbag one each for driver s seat and front passenger s seat e Side airbag one each for driver s seat and front passenger s seat e Curtain airbag one each for the out board sides of cabin extending from driv ers and front passenger s seats to rear second seating row These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the primary protec tion provided by the seatbelt The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners For operation instructions and precautions conc
376. tached to each side of the cargo area f Gg LP A retaining pin is located on the drivers side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler door release Fit the grommet in the car pet onto the pin to prevent the carpet from moving 600497 CONTINUED 6 12 Interior equipment 600427 Make sure the driver s floor mat is placed back in its proper location and correctly secured on its retain ing pin If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving it could cause an accident Convenient tie down hooks The convenient tie down hooks are designed only for securing light car go Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks The maximum load capacity is 44 Ibs 20 kg per hook 600428 The cargo area is equipped with four tie down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a luggage net or ropes When using the tie down hooks turn them down out of the storing recesses When not in use put the hooks up into the stor ing recesses Under floor storage compart ment The subfloor storage compartment is lo cated under the floor of the cargo area and can be used to store small items To open the lid pull the handle up e Always keep the lid of the sub floor storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stop or an accident Do not store spray cans
377. tal activation of the system or rendering the sys tem inoperative which may result in serious injury no modifications should be made to any compo nents or wiring of the SRS airbag system This includes following modifica tions Installation of custom steering wheels Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard Installation of custom seats Replacement of seat fabric or leather Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 69 e Attachment of a hands free mi e Installation of a tire of different crophone or any other accesso size and construction from the ry to a front pillar a center pillar tires specified on the vehicle plac a rear pillar the windshield a ard attached to the driver s door side window an assist grip or pillar or specified for individual any other cabin surface that vehicle models in this Owner s would be near a deploying SRS Manual curtain airbag e Attachment of any equipment e Installation of additional electri side steps or side sill protectors cal electronic equipment such etc other than genuine SUBARU as a mobile two way radio on or accessory parts to the side body near the SRS airbag system components and or wiring is not advisable This could inter fere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts on your vehicle
378. tem Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru advanced frontal airbag system that com plies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS No 208 The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys tem automatically determines the deploy ment force of the driver s SRS frontal air bag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front pas senger s SRS frontal airbag and if activat ed the deployment force of the SRS fron tal airbag at the time of deployment Your vehicle has warning labels on the driver s and front passenger s sun visors beginning with the phrase EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS and a tag at tached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase Even with Advanced Air Bags Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag Always wear your seatbelt The subaru advanced frontal airbag system is a sup plemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt All occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system The drivers SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering wheel The front passenger s SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under an SRS AIRBAG mark In a moderate to severe frontal collision the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy and supplement the seatbel
379. ter screen When the element is perforat ed or removed engine wear will be exces sive and engine life shortened The air cleaner element is a dry type It is unnecessary to clean or wash the ele ment E Replacing the air cleaner ele ment Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the War ranty and Maintenance Booklet Under extremely dusty conditions replace it more frequently It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts CONTINUED 1 1 1 4 Maintenance and service 1 Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner case cover B00313 2 Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air cleaner element 3 Install a new air cleaner element 4 To install the air cleaner case cover snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover Spark plugs It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs It is recommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer The spark plugs should be replaced ac cording to the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet E Recommended spark plugs ILFR6B NGK Drive belts Automatic transmission fluid The alternator power steering pump and air conditioner compressor depend on drive belts Satisfactory performance re quires that belt tension be correct It is unnecessary to check belt tension pe riodically because your engine is equipped with
380. that contain those sol vents Appearance care 10 5 Maintenance schedule NENNEN Maintenance precautions KEEN KEE NEEN Before checking or servicing in the engine ei ell En du E E When you do checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is BUNTING ceo teers seca EE Engine hood Engine compartment overview een Engine Gil cco iii tiie Ohne anid Checking the oil level cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Changing the oil and oil filter een Recommended grade and viscosity En Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving conditions SEENEN Cooling system Hose and CONNECTIONS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees Engine COOLANT EE Air cleaner element cccccseseeeesesseeseeeeeeeeaees Replacing the air cleaner element c00 Spark PlugS edeeege ege Recommended spark plugs 00 sseeseeeeeeeeees Drive belts Zgdiessgete eg Asse ete Automatic transmission fluid c cceeeee Checking the fluid level cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Recommended fluid cccceeceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees Front differential gear oil RER EEEE En Checking the oil level ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Maintenance and service Recommended grade and viscosity En 11 17 Rear differential gear oil RRE EEE En 11 17 Checking the gear Oil level ccceeeeeeeeteteeeeeeees 11 17 Recommended grade and viscosity en 11 18 Power
381. the disc Vv Folder selection MP3 disc Press the a side of the SEEK FLDR button 2 briefly to select the next folder Pressing the v side of the same button the first time makes the player go back to the beginning of the currently selected file pressing it a second time makes it go back to the previously selected file NOTE Only MP3 folders are recognized when an attempt to select the next or previ ous folder is made If no appropriate folder exists on the disc pressing the or y side of the SEEK FLDR button has no effect CONTINUED 5 10 Audio V Repeating V To repeat the currently playing track file track To repeat a track file track briefly press the RPT button 6 while the track file track is playing The display will show RPT and the track file track will be re peated To cancel the track file track repeat play mode Press the RPT button once non MP3 disc Press the RPT button twice MP3 disc The RPT indication will go off and the normal playback mode will be resumed NOTE e With an MP3 disc inserted each time you briefly press the button the mode will change to the next one in the fol lowing sequence RPT gt D RPT gt CANCEL If you accidentally press the button and cancel the track file track repeat play mode press it again to reselect the repeat play mode e The repeat play mode will be
382. the light is flashing you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possi ble If this light comes on while driving never brake suddenly and keep driv ing straight ahead while gradually reducing speed Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place Otherwise an accident involving serious vehi cle damage and serious personal in jury could occur If this light still comes on while driv ing after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor transmitter being transferred the Low tire pres sure warning light will flash This in dicates the TPMS is unable to moni tor all four road wheels Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replace ment and or system resetting If the light flashes promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected Instruments and controls 3 1 5 ignition switch is turned to the ON posi tion and goes out after approximately two seconds This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked period ically at least
383. the neck When wearing the seatbelts make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck If it does adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision V Unfastening the seatbelt 100105 Push the button on the buckle Before closing the door make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door Vv Rear seatbelts 5 seater models Second row seatbelts 7 seater models excluding center seatbelt 1 Sit well back in the seat 2 Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly Do not let it get twisted If the belt stops before reaching the buckle return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly If the belt still cannot be unlocked let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it then pull it out slowly again 2 100102 3 Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click ZS 4 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt 5 Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips not on your waist 100103 V Adjusting the shoulder belt anchor height rear seats of 5 seater mod els second row seats of 7 seater models Sec 100375 The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for you To lower the anchor
384. the prop er inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure moni toring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driv ing on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is nota substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to main tain correct tire pressure even if under in flation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale The TPMS gives warning both when a tire is significantly under inflated and when there is a problem in the TPMS The low tire pressure warning light operates differ ently according to these conditions as fol lows When atire is significantly under inflat ed Steady illumination When there is a problem in the TPMS Flashing Should the warning light flash have the system inspected by your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as possible If this light does not come on briefly after the ignition switch is turned ON or
385. the se lector lever in the N neutral posi tion Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an ac cident is consequently increased V D Drive This position is for normal driving The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to 5th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require When more acceleration is required in this position press the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position The transmission will automatically downshift to 4th 3rd 2nd or 1st gear When you re lease the pedal the transmission will re turn to the original gear position To use the SPORT mode move the lever from this position into the manual gate To use the manual mode move the lever from this position into the manual gate then move it toward the and ends V While climbing a grade When driving up a hill undesired upshift to 4th or 5th gear is prevented from taking place when the accelerator is released This minimizes the chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accel erating again This prevents repeated up shifting and downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle NOTE The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear depending on the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to ac celerate the vehicle again V While going down a hill When you are descending a hill or any other slope while bra
386. the tire placard Us ing other sizes circumferences or con struction may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride handling braking speedometer odometer calibration and clearance between the body and tires It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control e f you use a temporary spare tire to re place a flat tire be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle e Always check the cold tire pressure be fore starting to drive The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire plac ard which is located under the door latch on the driver s side e Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only e There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle For detail information see Towing sec tion in chapter 9 Driving tips 8 5 On pavement and off road driving e In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt You the driver and all your passengers should fasten the seatbelts before starting to drive in order to minimize the chance of serious injury or death Do not make sharp turns and quick maneuvers unless abso lutely unavoidable Such actions are dangerous as you may lose control possibly resulting in a rollover which coul
387. tion and with the parking brake fully released If the brake system warning light should come on while driving with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in ON it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads If this occurs immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place and check the brake fluid level If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reser voir do not drive the vehicle Have the ve hicle towed to the nearest SUBARU deal er for repair V Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD system warning The brake system warning light also illu minates if a malfunction occurs in the EBD system In that event it comes on together with the ABS warning light The EBD system may be faulty if the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driv ing Even if the EBD system fails the conven tional braking system will still function However the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are ap plied harder than usual and the vehicle s motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously take the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe flat place 2 Shut down the engine then restart it 3 Release the parking brake If both warning lights go out the EBD system may be faulty
388. tion in this chapter NOTE To protect the engine while the P po sition is selected the engine is con trolled such that the engine speed does not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is pressed hard V R Reverse This position is for backing the vehicle Starting and operating 7 9 To shift from the N to R position stop the vehicle completely then move the le ver to the R position while pushing the release button Vv N Neutral This position is for restarting a stalled en gine In this position the wheels and transmis sion are not locked In this position the transmission is neutral the vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is on Avoid coasting with the transmission neu tral During coasting there is no engine brak ing effect NOTE e To protect the engine while the N position is selected the engine is con trolled such that the engine speed does not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is pressed hard e If the selector lever is in the N po sition when you stop the engine for parking you may not subsequently be able to move it to the R and P posi tions If this happens turn the ignition switch to the ON position You will then be able to move the selector lever to the P position CONTINUED 7 10 Starting and operating Do not drive the vehicle with
389. tions have caused it to freeze shut function The anti entrapment does not operate when the moon roof is being tilted down Be sure to confirm that it is safe to do so before tilting the moonroof down The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions The moonroof operates only when the ig nition switch is in the ON position CONTINUED 2 24 Keys and doors E Tilt function 200737 1 Tilt up 2 Tilt down The tilting function will only operate when the moonroof is fully closed Push the rear side of the Tilt switch to raise the moonroof Push the front side of the Tilt switch to lower the moonroof Release the switch after the moonroof has been raised or has been lowered com pletely Pushing the switch continuously may cause damage to the moonroof NOTE One touch operation does not take place when the moonroof is tilted up and down Push the switch continu ously to tilt the moonroof up and down E Sliding function 200738 1 Open 2 Close Push the Open Close switch rearward to open the moonroof The sun shade will also be opened together with the moon roof Push the Open Close switch forward to close the moonroof The moonroof will stop halfway if you continue to press on the switch Release the switch once and push it again to close the moonroof com pletely To stop the moonroof at a selected mid way position while o
390. tire and vehicle load capaci ties The sum of four tires maximum load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight GVWR In addition sum of the maximum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axle s maximum loaded capacity GAWR Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR And each axle s maximum loaded capacity is referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GVWR and each axle s GAWR are shown on the vehicle cer tification label affixed to the driver s door The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are determined by not only the maximum load rating of tires but also loaded capacities of the vehicle s suspension axles and other parts of the body Therefore this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tire s maximum load rating on the tire sidewall E Adverse safety consequenc es of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires Overloading could affect vehicle han dling stopping distance vehicle and tire as shown in the following This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury e Vehicle stability will deteriorate e Heavy and or high mounted loads could increase the risk of rollover e Stopping distance will increase Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13 11
391. ton 4 SEEK FLDR button 5 RDM button 6 RPT button 7 SCAN button 8 Eject button 9 Disc select button 10 LOAD button NOTE e Be sure to insert a disc with the label side up If you insert the disc the label side down CHECK DISC will appear on the display and the player will not play anything e If a disc is inserted during a radio broadcast the disc will interrupt the broadcast e The player is designed to be able to play music CD Rs and music CD RWs but it may not be able to play certain ones e Single CDs i e 8 cm 3 inch CDs are not supported and if inserted they will be immediately ejected e Insert discs slowly one at a time In serting discs one over another could result in malfunction of the CD chang er CONTINUED 5 18 Audio V How to insert a CD s V Inserting a CD 1 Briefly press the LOAD button 10 If the magazine in the player has an idle po sition where you can insert a disc the disc number indicator associated with the idle position will blink If no indicator blinks it means that there is no idle position in the magazine 2 After the disc number indicator has started to flash insert the disc when LOAD flashes on the display The disc will then be automatically drawn in and the player will begin to play back the first track of the disc e To insert more discs in succession re peat Steps 1 and 2 The magazine will be loaded with discs in the
392. towing can result in failure of the spare tire and or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an ac cident When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor trans mitter being transferred the low tire pressure warning light will flash This indicates the tire pres sure monitoring system TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and or system resetting Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original Using other sizes may result in severe mechani cal damage to the drive train of your vehicle The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is de signed for emergency use only Remove the temporary spare tire and re install the conventional tire as soon as possible be cause the spare tire is designed only for temporary use Check the inflation pressure of the tempo rary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use The correct pressure is 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 kgf cmz2 When using the temporary spare tire note the following e Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire Because of the smaller tire size a tire chain will not fit properly e Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time e Do not drive over obstacles This tire has a smaller diameter so roa
393. trol system OFF switch page 7 23 6 Light control lever page 3 26 7 Combination meter page 3 5 8 Wiper control lever page 3 29 9 Cruise control page 7 27 10 Horn page 3 37 11 SRS airbag page 1 44 12 Tilt steering page 3 37 13 Hood lock release knob page 11 4 14 Fuse box page 11 36 15 Power windows page 2 19 12 000106 CONTINUED 16 E Light control and wiper control levers switches 1 Parking light switch page 3 28 2 Windshield wiper page 3 29 3 Mist page 3 31 4 Windshield washer page 3 30 5 Rear window wiper and washer switch page 3 32 6 Wiper control lever page 3 30 7 Light control lever page 3 26 8 Fog light switch page 3 28 9 Headlight ON OFF page 3 26 10 Headlight flasher High Low beam change page 3 26 11 Turn signal page 3 27 17 E Combination meter 1 Temperature gauge page 3 8 2 Tachometer page 3 7 V U S spec vehicles 3 Speedometer page 3 6 4 Fuel gauge page 3 8 5 Trip meter and odometer page 3 6 page 3 7 6 Trip meter A B selection and trip meter reset knob page 3 7 7 Selector lever Gear position indicator page 3 20 AT OIL TEMP AR aps CHECK Wio Oe E W 000110 CONTINUED 18 V Canada spec vehicles AT OIL TEMP wO CRUISE SET AWD Co NKE B
394. ts 13 3 e Speed ratings apply only to the tire not to the vehicle Put ting a speed rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the ve hicle can be operated at the tire s rated speed The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out damaged repaired retreaded or other wise altered from their original condition If tires are repaired retreaded or otherwise al tered they may not be suitable for original equipment tire de signed loads and speeds v Tire Identification Number TIN Tire Identification Number TIN is marked on the intended outboard sidewall The TIN is composed of four groups Here is a brief review of the TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 2 3 4 1 Manufacturer s Identification Mark 2 Tire Size 3 Tire Type Code 4 Date of Manufacture The first two figures identify the week starting with 01 to represent the first full week of the calendar year the second two figures represent the year For example 0101 means the 1st week of 2001 v Other markings The following makings are also placed on the sidewall Y Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated For example 300 kpa 44 PSI MAX PRESS Y Maximum load rating The load rating at the maximum per missible weight load for this tire For example MAX LOAD 730 kg 1609 LBS 300 kpa 44 PSI MAX
395. ts by reducing the impact on the drivers and front passengers head and chest Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 49 NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG Never allow a child to stand up or to kneel on the front passenger s seat The SRS airbag deploys with con siderable force and can injure or even kill the child CONTINUED 1 50 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 100125 100155 Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can in jure or even kill the child The SRS airbag deploys with con siderable speed and force Occu pants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries Be cause the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possi ble and sit upright and well back in the seat It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag con tacts an occupant not in proper po sition such as one thrown toward the front of the vehicle during pre accident brak
396. ts temperature rises the fluid level dif fers according to fluid temperature There fore the reservoir tank has two different checking ranges for hot and cold fluids Check the power steering fluid level monthly 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine 2 Check the fluid level of the reservoir tank When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run Check that the oil level is be tween HOT MIN and HOT MAX on the surface of the reservoir tank When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run Check that the oil level is between COLD MIN and COLD MAX on the sur face of the reservoir tank 3 If the fluid level is lower than the appli cable MIN line add the recommended fluid as necessary to bring the level be tween the MIN and MAX line Maintenance and service 1 1 1 9 If the fluid level is extreme low it may indi cate possible leakage Consult your SUBARU dealer for inspection E Recommended fluid Dexron II Type Automatic Transmis sion Fluid 1 1 20 Maintenance and service Brake fluid E Checking the fluid level e Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes If brake fluid gets in your eyes immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water For safety when perform ing this work wearing eye protec tion is advisable Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air Any absorbed moisture
397. u are tired or sleepy On long trips you should make periodic rest stops to refresh your self before continuing on your journey When possible you should share the driv ing with others E Car phone cell phone and driving Do not use a car phone cell phone while driving it may distract your at tention from driving and can lead to an accident If you use a car phone cell phone pull off the road and park in a safe place before using your phone In some States Provinces only hands free phones may legally be used while driving E Modification of your vehicle Your vehicle should not be modi fied Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be cov ered under warranties E Driving with pets Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from 7 driving In a collision or sudden stop unre strained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers Besides the pets can be hurt under these situations It is also for their own safety that pets should be prop erly restrained in your vehicle Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be secured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seat belt through the carr
398. uggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident E Access to the third row seat There is a lever on the side of the second row seat behind the front passenger s seat This lever is used to facilitate access to the third row seat In its slid forward position with the seatback tipped forward the sec ond row seat behind the front pas senger seat is not locked and free to move Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this state or allow anyone to sit on the seat unless it is com pletely locked Doing so may result in serious injury or death When getting into or out of the third row seat make sure the second row seat is in the completely slid for ward position and be sure to watch your step V To access the third row seat Raise the lever The seatback of the sec ond row seat will tip forward and the seat will slide forward Before driving the vehicle adjust the fore aft position of the second row seat raise the seatback and make sure the seatback is securely locked in position V To get out from the third row seat 100677 Raise the lever from the third row seat The seatback of the second row seat will tip forward and the seat will slide forward Before driving the vehicle adjust the fore aft position of the second row seat raise the seatback
399. ull off the road to a safe place Otherwise an accident involving serious vehi cle damage and serious personal in jury could occur If this light still comes on while driv ing after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor transmitter being transferred the low tire pres sure warning light will flash This in dicates the TPMS is unable to moni tor all four road wheels Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replace ment and or system resetting If the light flashes promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected E Tire inspection Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage nails and stones At the same time check the tires for abnormal wear Contact your SUBARU dealer immediate ly if you find any problem NOTE e When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are subjected to harsh treat ment as when the vehicle is driven ona rough surface they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed Try not to drive over curbs potholes or on oth er rough surfaces If doing so is un avoidable keep the vehicle s spee
400. um wheels with water as soon as possi ble when it has been splashed with sea water exposed to sea breezes or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents Appearance care 1 0 3 Corrosion protection Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance strength and reliable operation E Most common causes of cor rosion The most common causes of corrosion are 1 The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas 2 Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when 1 Itis exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air or in areas where there is considerable industrial pol lution 2 Itis driven in areas of high humidity es pecially when temperatures range just above freezing 3 Dampness in certain parts of the vehi cle remains for a long time even though CONTINUED 10 4 Appearance care other parts of the vehicle may be dry 4 High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation E To help prevent corrosion Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent cor rosion of the body and suspe
401. ur warranty Y MMT Some gasoline contains an octane en hancing additive called MMT Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbony If you use such fuels your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light Mal function indicator lamp may turn on If this happens return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service If it is deter mined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be cov ered by your warranty V Gasoline for cleaner air Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle Fuels con taining alcohol may cause paint damage which is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty Your use of gasoline with detergent addi tives will help prevent deposits from form ing in your engine and fuel system This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air If you continuously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank Many gasolines are now blended with ma terials called oxygenates Use of these fu els can also help keep the air cleaner Ox ygenated blend fuels such as MTBE Me thyl Tertiary Butyl ether or ethanol ethyl or grain alcohol may be used in your ve hicle but should contain no more than 15 MTBE or 10 ethanol for the prope
402. ure the passengers 100360 Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place E Folding down the seatback e After returning the seat to its orig inal position be certain to place all of the seatbelts and the tab at tached to the seat cushion above the seat cushion And make cer tain that the shoulder belts are ful ly visible Never allow passengers to ride on the folded seatback or in the car go area Doing so may result in se rious injury or death Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration 100361 1 Slide the seat or seat pair to its rear most position 2 Lower the head restraint to its lowest position 3 Unlock the seatback by pulling the le ver and then fold the seatback down 4 To return the seatback to its original position raise the seatback until it locks into place Make sure it is securely locked Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 9 100366 By pulling the tab on the center seat you can fold only the seatback of the center seat To return the seatback to its original posi tion raise the seatback until it locks into place Make sure it is securely locked CONTINUED 1 1 0 Seat seatbelt and
403. use Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit 1 30A Vehicle dynamics control unit 2 25A Main fan 3 25A Main fan 4 15A Headlight right side 5 15A Headlight left side 6 20A Backup 7 15A Horn 8 25A Rear window defogger 9 15A Fuel pump 10 15A Automatic transmission control unit 11 7 5A Engine control unit 12 15A Turn and hazard warning flasher 13 20A Parking switch 14 7 5A Alternator 12 8 Specifications Bulb chart Description Wattage Bulb No Headlight Low beam 12V 55W H7 High beam 12V 65W H9 Fog light 12V 55W H3 Front turn signal Park 12V 27 8W ing light Parking Front side 12V 5W marker light Rear combination light Rear turn signal 12V 21W W21W light Brake tail 12V 21 5W W21 5W Tail light 12V 3 8W 194 Backup light 12V 16W 921 License plate light 12V 5W 168 Cargo area light 12V 13W Dome light 12V 5W Map light 12V 8W Door step light 12V 3W Rear gate light 12V 5W W5W Specifications 12 9 Vehicle identification 1 Vehicle identification number 2 Certification and bar code label 3 Tire inflation pressure label 4 Vehicle identification number plate 5 Model number plate 6 Emission control label 7 Fuel label C00110 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects Tire information eege 13 2 Tire l eling ae aort eg sgeeug dee ctescnaserecosssccnanactae 13 2 Recommended tire inflation pressure 13 5 Glossary of tire terminology ccccc
404. ush up its bot tom surface with his her feet e Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle or under the driver s seat If the seatbelt buckle switch and or the driver s seat position sensor have failed the SRS airbag system warning light will il luminate Although the driver s SRS fron tal airbag can deploy regardless of the backward forward adjustment of the driv er s seat position even when the warning light is on have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light comes on Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 51 NOTE The driver s SRS side airbag SRS cur tain airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled by the Subaru ad vanced frontal airbag system V Front passenger s SRS frontal air bag The front passenger s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator The inflator op erates in different ways depending on the severity of impact The total load on the seat is monitored by the occupant detection system s weight sensor located under the seat The system has another sensor that mon itors the tension of the front passenger seatbelt Using the total seat load and seatbelt tension data from the sensors the occupant detection system deter mines whether the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag should or should not be in flated The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag even when the driver s SR
405. ve According to accident statistics cushion angle or seat height hicle is in motion Also do not place children are safer when properly re objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback If you do so the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase and both can result in serious inter nal injury or death strained in the rear seating posi E Reclining the seatback tions than in the front seating posi tions For instructions and precau tions concerning child restraint sys tems see the Child restraint sys tems section in this chapter E Power seat V Fore and aft adjustment 100085 100354 To adjust the angle of the seatback move the control switch CONTINUED 1 4 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags Vv Seat cushion angle adjustment Driver s seat only 100352 To adjust the seat cushion angle pull up or push down the front end of the control switch V Seat height adjustment Driver s seat only 100353 To adjust the seat height pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch E Head restraint adjustment 100355 To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower it push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is clos
406. ve the subfloor storage lid in the Cargo area 3 Take out the jack 5 Remove the cap 6 Locate the hex headed hoist shaft end inside the hole In case of emergency 9 3 7 Fit the extension onto the hex headed hoist shaft end 8 Fit the wheel nut wrench onto the ex tension 9 Turn the hoist shaft end counterclock CONTINUED 9 4 In case of emergency wise with the wheel nut wrench until the temporary spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle e Be sure to remove not simply keep it open the subfloor storage lid before turning the wheel nut wrench otherwise the lid may be damaged e Do not put your fingers into the center hole of the temporary spare tire while you pulling it out because they might be pinched in between the wheel and the retain 900207 10 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the tempo rary spare tire 11 After the temporary spare tire is re moved from the cable the cable must be wound up completely by turning the hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear a click ing sound Also visually inspect the cable to make certain that there is no longer any slack present 900208 e Do not use the extension when turning the wheel nuts If you did you would not be able to achieve sufficient tightening torque The wheel nuts could then come loo
407. vehicle han dles This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Do not place anything on the ex tended luggage cover Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision This could cause serious injury Do not carry spray cans containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle NOTE For better fuel economy do not carry unneeded cargo E Vehicle capacity weight 800202 The load capacity of your vehicle is deter mined by weight not by available cargo space The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver s side door pillar It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their be longings any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch roof rack or bike carrier etc and the tongue load of a trailer E GVWR and GAWR Gross Ve hicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating 800203 Certification label The certification label attached to the driv er s side door shows GVWR Gross Vehi cle Weight Rating and GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GVW Gross Vehicle Weight must never exceed the GVWR GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle fu el driver all passengers luggage any optional equipment and traile
408. ven killed E Where to place a child re straint system The following are SUBARU s recommen dations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 31 100501 A Front passenger s seat You should not install a child restraint sys tem including a booster seat due to the hazard to children posed by the passen ger s airbag B Rear outboard seats 5 seater mod els second row outboard seats 7 seater models Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems In these positions Automatic Emergency Locking Retractor A ELR seatbelts and lower anchorages bars are provided for installing a child restraint system Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projec tion of the seat cushion In this seating position you should use CONTINUED 1 32 Seat seatbelt and SRS airbags only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt C Rear center seat 5 seater models second row center seat 7 seater mod els Installing a child restraint system is not recommended although the A ELR seat belt and an upper anchorage tether an chorage are provided in this position Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to projec tion of the seat cus
409. verheats safely pull off the road and stop the vehicle in a safe place E if steam is coming from the engine compartment Turn off the engine and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down E if no steam is coming from the engine compartment 1 Keep the engine running at idling speed 2 Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment Confirm that the cooling fan is turning If the fan is not turning immediately turn off the engine and contact your authorized dealer for repair 3 After the engine coolant temperature has dropped turn off the engine If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone turn off the engine 4 After the engine has fully cooled down check the coolant level in the reserve tank If the coolant level is below the MIN mark add coolant up to the MAX mark 5 If there is no coolant in the reserve tank add coolant to the reserve tank Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap then turn the cap counter clockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops Release the pressure from the radiator After the pressure has been fully released remove the cap by pressing down and turning it Towing Never tow AWD vehicles with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground or with the rear wheels raised o
410. weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight es Normal occupant weight 150 Ibs 68 kg times the number of occupants 3 occupants e Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle 2 in front 1 in rear seat e Production options weight The combined weight of those in stalled regular production options Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13 7 weighing over 5 1 Ibs 2 3 kg in ex cess of those standards items which they replace not previously consid ered in curb weight or accessory weight e Vehicle capacity weight The total weight of cargo luggage and occupants that can be added to the vehicle e Vehicle maximum load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is deter mined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two e Vehicle normal load on a tire Load on an individual tire that is deter mined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight accessory weight and normal occupant weight and dividing by two E Tire care maintenance and safety practices e Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage nails and stones At the same time check the tires for abnormal wear e Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible When a tire s tread wear indicator becomes visible the tire is worn beyond the ac ceptable limit
411. wever in hot weather oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine E Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driv ing conditions If the vehicle is used in desert areas in ar eas with very high temperatures or used for heavy duty applications such as tow ing a trailer use of oil with the following grade and viscosities is recommended API classification SM or SL SAE viscosity No 30 40 10W 50 20W 40 20W 50 Cooling system Never attempt to remove the radia tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down com pletely Since the coolant is under pressure you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed e The cooling system has been filled at the factory with a high quality corrosion inhibiting year around coolant which provides protection against freezing down to 33 F 36 C For adding use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent a mixture of 50 soft water and 50 ethylene glycol ba sis coolant Use of improper cool ants may result in corrosion in the cooling system It is important to maintain protection against freez ing and corrosion even if freezing temperatures are not expected Never mix different kinds of cool ant e Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface E Hose and connection
412. while gradually reducing speed Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place Otherwise an acci dent involving serious vehicle dam age and serious personal injury could occur Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the driver s side If this light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may have signif icant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor transmitter being transferred the low tire pres sure warning light will flash This in dicates the TPMS is unable to moni tor all four road wheels Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replace ment and or system resetting Do not inject any tire liquid or aero sol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors If the light flashes promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the sys tem inspected In case of emergency 9 11 Jump starting e Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID Do not let it come in contact with the eyes skin clothing or the ve hicle If battery fluid gets on you thor oughly flush the exposed area with water immediately Get medi cal help i
413. y tires best suited for highway driving under dry conditions Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow cov ered or icy roads If you drive your vehicle on snow covered or icy roads we strongly recommend the use of winter Snow tires When installing winter tires be sure to re Maintenance and service 1 1 23 place all four tires V Winter snow tires Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow covered and icy roads However winter tires do not perform as well as sum mer tires and all season tires on roads oth er than snow covered and icy roads E Tire pressure monitoring sys tem TPMS The tire pressure monitoring system pro vides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low The tire pressure monitor ing system will activate only when the ve hicle is driven Also this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a blow out caused by running over a sharp object If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm garage and will then drive the vehicle in cold outside air the resulting drop in tire pressures may cause the low tire pressure warning light to come on To avoid this problem when adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage inflate the tires to pres sures higher than those shown on the tire placard Specifically inflate them by an extra
414. y of the HomeLink buttons are al ready programmed for other devices skip step 2 because it clears the mem ory of all three buttons 3 Hold the end of the entrance gate s ga rage door opener s hand held transmitter between 1 and 3 inches 25 and 76 mm away from the HomeLink buttons on the drivers sun visor keeping the indicator light in view 600434 4 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button 5 Press and release cycle the hand held transmitter button every two seconds until step 6 is complete 6 When the indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly after several seconds re lease both buttons 7 Plug the motor of the entrance gate ga rage door opener to the outlet 8 Test your entrance gate garage door Opener by pressing the programmed HomeLink button E Programming other devices To program other devices such as door locks home lighting and security systems contact HomeLink at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 E Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System Once programmed the HomeLink Wire less Control System can be used to re mote control the devices to which its but tons are programmed To activate a de vice simply press the appropriate button The indicator light illuminates indicating that the signal is being transmitted E Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 1 Press and hold the HomeLink button you wish to reprogram DO N
415. y pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch Do not use with any type of weight dis tributing hitch The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated load The maximum gross trailer weight and maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table Driving tips 8 15 Maximum Maximum gross trailer gross tongue weight weight vehicle with 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs out cooling kit 906 kg 90 kg 350 Ibs 158 kg vehicle with cooling kit 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg When you tow a trailer follow the instruc tions in the next section Trailer towing E Connecting a trailer 1 Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver tube Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube 800257 2 Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the CONTINUED 8 16 Driving tips hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount ame Se ee Bee 800207 3 Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin securely 4 Pull the ball mount to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver 1 Hitch ball installation point 2 Hooks for safety chains 5 Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
416. y result in serious injury and damage to your vehicle This manual is composed of fourteen chapters Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the infor mation you want Chapter 1 Seat seatbelt and SRS air bags This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains precau tions for the SRS airbags Chapter 2 Keys and doors This chapter informs you how to operate the keys locks and windows Chapter 3 Instruments and controls This chapter informs you about the opera tion of instrument panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches Chapter 4 Climate control This chapter informs you how to operate CONTINUED 2 the climate control Chapter 5 Audio This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system Chapter 6 Interior equipment This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment Chapter 7 Starting and operating This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU Chapter 8 Driving tips This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various conditions and ex plains some safety tips on driving Chapter 9 In case of emergency This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem while driving such as a flat tire or engine overheating Chapter 10 Appearance care This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good Chapter 11 Maintenance a
417. your Vehicle scceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 25 Cruise control ccccceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeseeseeeseaees 7 27 To Set cruise control REENEN ERKENNEN 7 27 To temporarily cancel the cruise control 7 28 To turn off the cruise Control c ccssseseeeeeeeeees 7 28 To change the cruising speed ken 7 28 Cruise control indicator light csseeeeeeeeeee 7 29 Cruise control set indicator light 00008 7 30 7 2 Starting and operating Fuel Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel addi tive may cause engine damage E Fuel requirements The engine is designed to operate using premium unleaded gasoline with an oc tane rating of 91 AKI or higher If premium unleaded gasoline is not available regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used For optimum engine performance and driveability it is recommended that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline VY Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane num bers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index AKI Using a gasoline with a lower octane rat ing can cause persistent and heavy knocking which can damage the engine Do not be concerned if your vehicle some times knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate See your dealer or a qualified service
418. ype of load For all types of hitches regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tight E Connecting a trailer V Trailer brakes e Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1 000 Ibs 453 kg total weight e Do not directly connect your trail er s hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle Direct connection would cause the vehicle s brake perfor mance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident If your trailer s total weight trailer weight plus its cargo weight exceeds 1 000 Ibs 453 kg the trailer is required to be equipped with its own brake system Elec tric brakes or surge brakes are recom mended and must be installed properly Check that your trailers brakes conform with Federal state province and or other applicable regulations Your SUBARU s brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailers hydraulic brake system Please ask your SUBARU dealer and pro fessional trailer supplier for more informa tion about the trailer s brake system V Trailer safety chains Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnect ed the trailer cou

Subaru A3100BE Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents